← Volver a la ficha del texto
3tO D,H(J)pOBa5I KOHHH KHHrH, XpaHHIIlpHCH pjIH HOTOMKOB Ha 6H6jIHOTeHHbIX HOJIKaX, HpeHtpe HeM ee OTCKaHHpOBaJIH COTpy^HHKH
KOMnaHHH Google b paMKax npoeKTa, pejib KOToporo - cpejiaTb KHurn co Bcero MHpa pocTymmiMH nepe3 HmrepHeT.
IlpOHIJIO pOCTaTOHHO MHOrO BpeMeHH PJIH Toro, HT06bI CpOK peHCTBHH aBTOpCKHX HpaB Ha 3Ty KHHry HCTeK, H OHa HepeniJia B CB06op,HbIH
pocTyn. KHHra nepexoppT b CBo6opHbiii pocTyn, ecjin Ha Hee He 6bijih nopaHbi aBTopcKne npaBa hjih cpoK peiiCTBHH aBTopcKHx npaB
HCTeK. Ilepexop khhth b cboGophbih pocTyn b pa3Hbix CTpaHax ocyrpecTBjmeTCH no-pa3HOMy. Khhth, HepemepniHe b CBo6opHbiii poeryn,
3TO Ham KJHOH K HpOHIJIOMy, K 6oraTCTBaM HCTOpHH H KyjIbTypbl, a TaKHCe K 3HaHHHM, KOTOpbie HaCTO TpypHO HaHTH.
B 3tom (J>aHJie coxpaHHTCH Bee HOMeTKH, HpHMenaHHH h ppyrne 3aHHCH, cyrpecTByioipHe b opnrHHajibHOM H3paHHH, KaK HanoMHHaHHe
O TOM POJITOM HyTH, KOTOpblH KHHra HpOHIJia OT H3paTeJIH pO 6 h6jIHOT6KH H B KOHeHHOM HTOre po Bac.
IIpaBHJia Hcnojib 30 BanH 5 i
KoMnaHHH Google roppHTCH TeM, hto coTpypHHnaeT c 6H6jiHOTeKaMH, hto6bi nepeBec™ khhth, HepemepniHe b cbo6ophbih poeryn, b
u,H(J)poBOH (J)opMaT h cpejiaTb hx mHpoKopocTyHHbiMH. KHHrn, HepemepniHe b cbo6ophbih pocTyn, HpHHapjiencaT o6rpecTBy, a mbi jranib
xpaHHTejiH 3 Toro poctohhhh. TeM He MeHee, 3th KHHrn pocTaTOHHO poporo ctoht, H 03 T 0 My, hto6hi h b pajibHenmeM npepocTaBjiHTb
3tot pecypc, mbi HpepnpHHHjiH HeKOTopbie pencTBHH, npepoTBparpaioipHe KOMMepnecKoe HCH 0 Jib 30 BaHne khht, b tom HHCJie ycTaHOBHB
TexHHnecKHe orpaHHneHHH Ha aBTOMaTHnecKne 3 anpocbi.
Mbi TaKHce npocHM Bac o cjiepyiorpeM.
• He HCHOJib3yHTe (Jianjibi b KOMMepnecKHx pejmx.
Mbi pa3pa6oTajiH nporpaMMy Hohck khht Google pjm Bcex H0Jib30BaTejieH, HOSTOMy HCHOJib3yHTe 3 th (Jianjibi tojihko b jihhhbix,
HeKOMMepnecKHx pejmx.
• He OTHpaBjmHTe aBTOMaTHnecKne 3anpocbi.
He OTHpaBjmHTe b cncTeMy Google aBTOMaTHnecKne 3anpocbi jno6oro BHpa. Ecjih Bbi 3 aHHMaeTecb H3yneHHeM chctcm MamHHHoro
nepeBopa, OHTHnecKoro pacH 03 HaBaHHH chmbojiob hjih ppyrnx oGjiacren, rpe pocTyn k 6 ojibmoMy KOJinnecTBy TeKCTa MonteT
OKa 3 aTbCH HOJie 3 HbiM , CBHHCHTecb c HaMH. /Jjm 3 thx pejieii Mbi peKOMeppyeM HCH 0 Jib 30 BaTb MaTepnajibi, HepemepniHe b cbo6ophbih
poeryH.
• He ypajiHHTe aTpn6yTbi Google.
B KancpoM (Jmiijie ecTb "bophhoh 3HaK M Google. Oh H 03 B 0 jmeT H 0 Jib 30 BaTejmM y3HaTb 06 3tom npoeKTe h HOMoraeT hm HaHTH
poHOJiHHTejibHbie MaTepnajibi npn HOMOipn nporpaMMbi Hohck khht Google. He ypajmiiTe ero.
• /Jejiafoe sto 3 aKOHHO.
He3aBHCHMO ot Toro, hto Bbi HCHOJib3yiiTe, He 3a6ypbTe npoBepHTb 3aKOHHOCTb cbohx pencTBHH, 3a KOTOpbie Bbi HeceTe nojiHyio
OTBeTCTBeHHOCTb. He pyMaHTe, hto ecjin KHHra nepemjia b CBo6opHbiH poeryn b CIHA, to ee Ha stom ocHOBaHHH MoryT
HCH0JIb30BaTb HHTaTeJIH H3 ppyTHX CTpaH. YCJIOBHH pjIH HepeXOpa KHHTH B CB06opHbIH pOCTyH B pa3HbIX CTpaHax pa3JIHHHbI,
H03T0My HeT epHHbIX HpaBHJI, H03B0JIHI0IH,HX OHpepeJIHTb, MOHCHO JIH B OHpepeJieHHOM CJiyHae HCH0JIb30BaTb OHpepeJieHHyiO
KHHry. He pyMairre, hto ecjin KHHra HOHBHjiacb b noncKe khht Google, to ee mohcho HCH0Jib30BaTb KaK yropHO h rpe yropHO.
HaKa3aHne 3a HapymeHHe aBTopcKHx npaB MonceT 6biTb oneHb cepbe3HbiM.
O nporpaMMe IIohck Knnr Google
Mhcchh Google coctoht b tom, hto6bi opraHH30BaTb MHpoByio HH(J)opMau,Hio h cpejiaTb ee BcecTopomre poerynHOH h HOJie3HOH.
nporpaMMa Hohck khht Google HOMoraeT H0Jib30BaTejmM HaHTH khhth co Bcero MHpa, a aBTopaM h H3paTejmM - hobmx HHTaTejien.
nojiHOTeKCTOBbiH hohck ho 3toh KHHre mohcho BbiHOJiHHTb Ha CTpaHHpe http://books.google.eom/
Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world’s books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that’s often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book’s long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non- commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google’s system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google “watermark” you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can’t offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book’s appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google’s mission is to organize the world’s information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world’s books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at jhttp : //books . qooqle . com/
hx snun 2
8? artrarb Cnllpg?
Sthrarg
THE BEQUEST OF
PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT
l98o-I926
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
Digitized by
Digitized by
Digitized by
Digitized by LjOOQie
Digitized by
Google
$ nf'- iOiA^<
Digitized by LjOOQie
COMPENDIOUS
A LI GRAMMAR,
▼ith a
COPIOUS VOCABULARY
IN THE SAME LANGUAGE,
«***»« «+««*» ****** *~~*
v BY THE
REV. BENJAMIN CLOUGH.
COLOMBO i
Printed at the Wesleyan Mission Press*
Digitized Jey
Google
1824 .
32 , 41 , 5 - 3 . ‘
HARVARD COLLEGE LIBRARY
FROM THE ESTATE OF
CHARLES ROCKWELL LANMAN
MARCH 15, 1941
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
advertisement.
These works were first undertaken by the justly ce*
Jebrated Oriental Linguist W. Tolvrey, Esq. late Qf
Jjl . ]fcj< Ciyil Service ha Ceylorv The forme* work Wfe*
considerably advanced by that Qqntleraan, and the latte#'
aW tarough ^ii^o a state of great fqrwardoas# T bey ar#r
new coinpMed* revised corrected
The Pali h^s undoubtedly a high plqim tq the atten?
tion of the literary world. It has long been a contested
point whether the Pqft Qr Sansgrit be the more ancient,
language of India ; , it is certain, that Pali was the popu*
Jar djqlept of the native pqqntry of Quddlio, namely Ma •
gadha , before the pqwerful sect fqgndec) by h jm, wa$ ex?
pelled front the continent of India, an $yent prior tq
the Christian iEra. Jts literature contains a considera?
ble number qf volumes both in pro§e and verse; which,
whatever may be theiy merits iq qther rqsppcts, form
jhe only authentic depositqry of Quddhujsm, and the
learning in general qf Ceylon, and the whole qf India
beyond 'the Ganges, fo which the Pali now is, and has
been for many centuries, what Sanskrit is in Jndj^ Pro?
per, and Latin iu Europe.
Digitized by LjOOQie
[ iv. ]
but although so ancient, so widely spread, and con-
taining so many valuable records of antiquity, jet nothing
has hitherto been published respecting the Pali language;
hence in many excellent papers in the Asiatic Researches
it still appeals as an unknown world . It is therefore
hoped that a short Grammar with a Vocabulary, cannot
fail of being acceptable to the learned in general.
The Grammar is chiefly a translation of a celebrated
tfork called Bdluvaldra , and the Vocabulary
of nouns, of one equally filmed callec^j0a^®^do^3es:flf
Abhidhana-ppadipikG • To which also is added, by the
editor, the 0o«ga>«?g'&j Dhalumanjusa , or a collection of
• „ * • .
Pali roots with a Pali interpretation, and the third per*
son singular of the present tense of the verbs formed
from each root; with an English translation.
\
\
Digitized by
Goc e
A
PALI GRAMMAR.
#» » »#» #»» » »»*»»
CHAP. I.
OF THE ELEMENTS.
The Pali Language has forty one characters.
&
/
{$ e So
©ga
«S3^ na
4. K ’a /n-
na
^ma
ALPHABET.
a qo & $ i cfi ^ u u
» ka © kha CP ga « gha
cha t5* ja SsSDjha
•t O |>a* * a pha -f €> 8a^6© Sha
eo-ta © tha C da O dha
t3,pa ©pha &»ba tP bha
cS ya cr ra Q la © ya
t3 sa £0 pa £(£la <*• ain xy * v
2. The first eight are vowels saro, and of these, three
viz. a Hf*G «> are short dttO, rassaM, and the remaining
five long <■«•, dighaw.
But © e‘and S) o are short when preceding a compound con*
sonant, as ©<0©,ettha, here ; S)©fi&o, oppho, a camel \ ©ea^oaa),
se^yo, eminent; ©taoc©, sotthi, a well.
The remaining letters are consonants ©is©’***)?, vyafijano.
The first twenty five consonants are distributed' into five
classes 9 ©3XP3, vaggo, viz. $^Q©:5XP0, ka-vaggo, including
«B©:P«&©; 0©©C5XP3, ca-vaggo, including © dT£5§)
8©©cpcp;), pa- vaggo, 9BS6^; C&0 *ksxpo, ia-vaggo, to © $
O tn; C3©©CPCP0, pa- vaggo, ca © © ®.
* p English hard t. ^klmrd d. p the aspirate.
1 Sclavonian 1. *
Digitized by
Google
2 PALI GBAMMAB*
3. The alphabet is also divided into two grand species of
letters, which may he termed surds and sonants. Surds q®W
W*, aghosBM, are such letters as in the first effort to form them
admit of no vocal sound, viat. the. two first letters of each of the
five classes of consonants, with the sibilant, <53 ©, © e£, 0 Q,
C3 <5, « t5, ». The remaining letters are denominated sonants
' ®8MC3«, ghosaM, vi*. c» «3 ©, 35SD © £b $ £>« 3 , © to
©. cfl cT $ © <$, cp3 &c.
The character • is distinguished by the name
NiggaljitaM, and in the alphabet usually takes the if to express it.
(a) «>8 ©-jsx 530, ka-vaggo, and £»{}))' are termed *s>&&s>e£,
kaNphnjo, or guttural.
f (i) ©8®'JX530, ca-vaggo, and c3 (y) are termed e»C5t®c*,
talujo, or palatal. v
C (u> and C38©ta»o, pa-vaggo, are termed ©eSsrf, opphajo,
or labial. .
©©©cfflcso, pavaggo, o* and'gr ( r and t) muSShajo,
lingual or cerebral.
' «3©®csxs), ta-vaggo, Qend C3 (1 and s) $«3®J ®e£, dantajo, or
dental.
C5 (e) is termed <s><^j3*»d£3l® 8^ kaNphataiiujo, as^proceeding
from the throat and palate.
© (o) is- termed «c®<!3rjS'.c5©ef. katr|)hop|lh»jo, as- proceeding
from the throat and lips.
0 fv) is termed $3>oT»s;e95se£, damtopphajo, as* proceeding
from the teeth and lips.
4. AAer learning the alphabet and proceeding to join the
letters so as to be able to read, the learner will perceive, that
though each vowel sound lias its respective character to express
it, yet in composition these characters are never written, except
as initials s for, when they occur as media Is or finals, they assume
a different shape from that given in the alphabet, and are ex-
pressed by certain symbols, wbieb the following scheme will
explain.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
As initials
9 W t £* C CP ® ’©
As medials and finals
* ° ^ cJ el *
* ^ ^ .0
As medials and finals in composition with a consonant
^® <?3 C>® £»© ©s>©3 ,
flfta aba ibi xbi ubu uku ebe obo y
tin ‘this manner the Towels maybe combined 'with any 'other
consonants.
N. B. I. When the vowels £ and come in composition
with «5, c», £55, (S', they are expressed by these two sym-
bols v, x,; but with every other consonant they take the form
annexed to ©. 2. The symbol of the & is placed before, but
pronounced after the consonant. The symbol of the © is
placed partly before and partly behind the consonant, but is
pronounced after it.
5* The vowel q (a) has no-symbol to express it, but is inherent
in every open consonant, and therefore must be sounded with
it; unless its place be supplied \ry another vowefl : hence Iwo
open consonants meeting together make a perfect sound, with-
out the insertion of any vowel mark ; as C5 and eft are both open
consonants, and in reading they must be pronounced puna not
pna . When the inherent vowel is to be dropt, the mitte con-
sonant mu9t be joined to another consonant. Ex. a handy
is pronounced l>attiio not Ijatatho. ©Ocf*, -a door, dv&c&M neflt
davaraM.
6. The • niggaljitnM, is always 6ilenfc; in sound it corresponds
with the French final n in mon y the Portuguese m in Jim, and
is the only silent consonant ever to be met with at the end of
!PuK words, as toum, me. ^n account of ats .rraperfect
•sound it is ^generally arranged among the vowels by
<5rammarittn*.
Digitized by LjOOQ le
4
PALI GltAHMAIt.
77^
Vl
C c
hhk
W>ir
7. In reading Pali the learner will often meet with certain
compounds and contractions of consonants which it may be well
to point out. The following are the principal.
V. Is t he symbol for ofl joined to another consonant, and is
united in the following way kya, and takes the sound of
y in yarn, and is always pronounced with the consonant to
which it is united, as £o*Rns # , v&kyaM, a word or sentence .
u Is the junction of 6 with a preceeding consonant, as
kra, ca, gra, ©, bra, as in atra, here .
* Is a substitute for cT placed on the top of the consonant,
and must be pronounced before it, as in the syllables ar*ka
which must be written but this is a combination seldom
occurring in Pd/i.
CO. Is a compound of E) and <£> and often occurs in writing,
asj©t£>^\ rnaggalo, happy , excellent , tire.
© Is the union of and © and is in common use, ^6>©%
)da>$ *, a stick.
& i* frequently written for the double 6© and called, Pali
cayanu , as «f©®©0, amacco, a king' s' minister.
© Is a compound of ^ and £) as C(9$©;), pasiddho, public .
^ Is the union and but seldom occurs in Pali,
r 0. Is a compound of$ and S, as in ©)c5., dwaraM, a door.
® Is compounded of © and ©, as in g@ Lumbini-
vanaM, the name of a gSbve where Buddho w as born.
From these remarks the nature of the other compound con-
sonants may be easily undm^tood^ as
©c£, e&, ©£>, g), a©, S>.
iccb jjh nc Sc h nj pph SSh tth tv nth pph bb
ON PRONUNCIATION.
8. After having learned the character^ in the Pali alphabet,
nothing scarcely can be more easy than for the learner to, proceed
tp reed; and he must be informed that the Pali characters have
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALI GRAMMAR.
5
invariably the same sound in composition which is given to them
•in the alphabet, and do not, as in English and other European
languages, change their sound with their situation.
OF THE VOWELS.
» 9. The vowel sounds are those expressed in the alphabet, in
European characters, according to the Italian, Spanish, and
Portuguese pronunciation; adopted by Sir William Jones and
mod other learned Orientalists.
qp. Whether written or understood sounds like a in captive
.Ex. 9<£GS£Z5£ , anno, another , tail ha, there .
cpo Is sounded as the former, only it is held twice as long, as
a in father . As a medial or final its symbol is o, an instance of
which may be seen in the word €»3"<3\ ka|o, time.
$ Sounds like the i in his or him ; after a consonant as a
medial or final, its symbol is ° as in 0^)3, pita, father;
inani, a jewels where it is mounted on the head pf the ^ and
& Is the corresponding long vowel and sounds like te in eel,
its symbol as a medial or final is * as in devi, a goddess,
queen .
C The first of these letters sounds like no in good . The
latter, as oo in moon . Their symbols as mtdials or finals are
and ^ or c L as has been already shewn in the scheme for
combining the vowels with the consonants, Ex. kucchi,
womb ; duto; a messenger ; putto, a son; cfv>,
rupa.M, a figure .
C5 Sounds like e in wliere 9 or ea in bear , its symbol is ® as*
C30., evaw, thus; devo, God .
© Takes the sound of o in stone or on in groan , its symbol
is ^ o as ^<?®ec9, puriso, a man .
This language has no diphthongs.
OF THE CONSONANTS.
The first class 9 or gutturals .
JO; «5 Has the precise sound of onr k in kalender as.in
karomi, / make or do .
Digitized by LjOOQie
® fo’the«ime aspirated and uttered 'with greater ffctw, 4 #
if connected wiih the letter t*>, and bas -a sound something lUm
aur k h in bwk»hall; it occubb in §©•, mukhasr, the factor
mouth.
&> Has Hie ssame Bound w our hard gdn garden , sw qftragr-p,
garttum,
*•0 Is "the same letter aspirated, and takesf besaiii© Bound an
gh in ghost) as ttor., gharaM, house*
® This letter as it stands in the ail phabet has « sound epme
what resembling that of ng in king. But it seldom etamhi
alone; it is most commonly compounded with tJther consonants
esintctfcdtflo, saggal)o, collection } compilation.
The second class , or palatals.
Jl © Sounds like chmchaff or the Italian c in Ocem^ as SteSKSv
eitUw, mind ; pacitiai, io cook ; &£)&, pacati, he cooks*
& 3« the same letter aspirated and soundslikeci in oharm;
the ch h in soatchifumse will give a tolerable idea of the
of this letter. Ex. chattaM, an umbrella.
tf The sound of this letter is expressed by/injsr, as £©«•,
jjvjtsai, life •
the former , letter aspirated hut is seldom used alone.
Ex. ©t5S$)*, majjhaM* middle*
.335 The Italian and French gn in Signore, stigneur 9 the
Spanish n in senor, the Portuguese nh in senhor. , or as our jf
in yarns if pronounced with the mouth open and &rcii^ the
sound through the nose, Ex. Sana*, knowledge.
The third class , or Tingudls ,
12. It is necessary to remark here, that in learning to ptconomce
the Indian alphabets and to read the languages, foreigners
often make mistakes by not being sufficiently careful to distin*
guish this from the following class of letters. The letters of
this class, being tingueds, are pronounced by turning the tip of
the tongue far back against the palate, which pradacasa hoUosr
Digitized by L,oOQle
lam* ttRouraju*
r
*tm& a* pwMedingr ftom-thehead;, and awlfiaegbattanpfing
togjveforcato tbefcio tankard* Thfjrm li lwntp MM rtai' by
the Anglo-Saxon and Icelandic letters |> and 8 according' to tha
system of Indo-Ronuwi Orthography proposed by Etsfesor
Haek-ia A LeUcr on the Antiquity of the Zextd,,addecsmd Ur the
literary Society of Bombay;, andamsther. Che the Mod# of ear
pressing the Indian , especially the Sanscrit and. Singhalese sounds
in European Characters , addresse&ta tke Literary and. Agricultu-
ral Society of Colombo >
© As already stated, resemble* thesound of our t in tankard
or pent-house , as £€£u’4 va]»£ati,. it is. fit,, worthy.
& Is the former letter aspirated as Sow., phhnau,a:plaaet
© Being a lingual its sound may bo tolerably well expressed
by our d in dance r pronounced as directed at the beginning, .with
the tipi of the tongue thrown bach open the palate,, as og,
P&J+&H. yellow.
l£) I» the former letter aspirated' Ex. 08tS<o»; va$8h*tajsy
prolonged, distracted.
Ah Sounds like ouc » when, preeeedsd by & as- in knock- Etc
mAtm, gaadji, he took.
The fourth class, or dentals.
T9 So distinguished from the foregoing classy by always
beeping, the end of the tongue closely pressedagainst theteeth^
the tip a little turned' downwards.
tss la the common dental l, a» tdani, oiL
S Is the same letter aspirated, as *su5o, katha^ history..
<p la the dental d, as £<£«»•, uda&au* water.
©• Is the same letter aspirated, as ®Q, madhu, honey,
go Is pronounced as the English n. Ex. ««<*, uadi, ritten
The fifth class , or labials.
Mi 83*- Tabes the sound of our p. asCsxSo,, pat ho, road.
tSi lathe same letter aspirated,. asi>0Q*, pkakatffruiL.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PAM GRAMMARS
8
£ 5 ). *$s sounded as b in balance . Ex. ©<3 So, balav'a,' strong.
•• 'tsb. Is the former letter aspirated, as ecoocft*?*, bhojanaM,
food.
©. Sounds as our m . as maggo, way.
The remaining letters which are termed ^0©3X£>O, a-vaggo,
miscellaneous , on account of their not being ranged in the classes
are equally easy to pronounce.
cfl. Is.our^, as ©>cflO, yo, who.
<f. Is our r, as c'Sfcw*, ratanaM, a precious stone.
< 3 . Is f, as < 3 *»?, lata, a creeper .
0 . Is our r, as 0 **>, vanaw, a grove or forest .
t3« The only sibilant in the Pali language, is pronounced
like our s, as t3:>, sa, she ; seto, E>/rt 7 e.
CC. Takes the sound of h pronounced with force, as qpcc*
al)aMj 7, boti, he is. It is here represented by 1) in
ordet fo distinguish it from the mere flign of aspiration h , which
is used inseparably together with the ten aspirate mutes.
0 . There is little difference in the sound of this letter from
the g, only that the Natives pronounce it with a little more
force, and the latter is considered a denial and the former a
lingua f, an instance of its souud is in kitiwsu, they
played. It is supposed to be like the Sclavonian t .
15. The • NiggaljitaM, has been already described. Its sound is
expressed by the small capital m, and the by N, according
to the above mentioned system of Professor Rask/ Neither of
them ever occur at the beginning of words; but the peculiar
reason for this representation is, that the former in P&li
as in Sanscrit, &c. approaches nearer to m , and is changed to
m before a vowel, and the latter is scarcely distinguishable
from the common n .
16. Although no Pali word terminates in a silent consonant;
yet in dividing such words as contain a compound one; the first
part may be so terminated, which is done by placing the sign f
on the top of the silent letter. Ex. as-so, ahorse , for
asso.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
9
CHAPTER. It
AM XIUP PejlBIJTATION OJF l&TT&ftl,
17. When any simple vowel opens upon another simple vowel
' Mir to itself the first is suppressed; as, from
llokaaggo, lok-Aggo, ri&r w thief of foe world .
But in instances like the Allowing this nje does not take
effect ; as, §'•$**> 06 ?* maM a^dsi, to me w*s j*n&
appanifcda*i, people epeedity.
18 . When any simple vowel opens upon anotherjsimple vow-
*1 dissimilar to itself, 4t»e dissimilar vowel.ts suppressed, and the
trowel suppressed may be either the final of tte first word or
Ifbe initial of the second ; m f Orfsnfl*®, perm ime, hut these j W
w®> pa ne me, or CS***#®, ponim# : — sometimes however when
the vowels are dissimilar they are both suppressed, and another
^substituted in tbeir stead ; for instance, where a fi n$l ep opens
upon an initial >9 aa ©fl§e»3* 0, bandhu&sa iva, like a relation , .
fhe.fi nal 9 and initial 9 are changed into © *nd become
©€®e€ 2 tt 8 * bandhtSistfiva j— where a final 9 opens upon jan
Initial ; as, in na-upeti, it does not happen, the ,
two words united become *«*rojpe&, ndpeti, by meaip of
the vowel © which is substituted for the final 9 and initial £:
the substituted vowel is denominated CDcTqp^^CSD, saru-4-
deso, vowel substitute .♦
19. Notwithstanding what is stated in No. 17, there are instan*
ces, where when two similar vowels come together, the first is
suppressed and the second made long; as, Jfcmtra ayaii,
* A vowel lengthened i« hem marked with the grave (\), and along
towel luhstintted for two other* with the oiouiOifca ( A ) according tP -the
orthographical sjstsm maatioaad JNp. IS*
M.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
10
pa£i grammar.
fhe re this, becomes tatrSyaM ; oHePf©, y&ni idha, i»
converted into yanidha, which is here,
bal)u upak&raM, is converted into ©teptaotf*,
bahftpakaraM, very helpful.
90. It cfi opens upon f the ^0 is suppressed and tlie f is made
long ; as, for ts©0f 0, saddlia idha, write fc!© 0, saddhidha,
faith here ; for tap& upamaM^ write •> tapupa-
tnaM, parabo/ically.
91. If opens upon f the latter vowel, C3o'ft3*o'?, para-saro,
tender vowel, is suppressed, and the former r-Qes^tfo, pub^a-
saro, upper vowel , is made long; as, for «Si*ra®0, kiMsu idha <£•«}
* 0, ki Msudha, what is here ?
99. Sometimes when & opens upon qp the c? is suppressed
and the letter o5 termed vyanjana*&de?o,
substituted in its stead ; as, for te-ajja, o^TfeS', t> aj^ja,
they to day; for ©eospv: te al)&M, eoiscp^*, tya-al)8M, them J
which afterwards by No, 17, becomes *jdt$£ 5>, tyaljaM : but the
© in na ettha, undergoes no change ; as, n’ettha*
not here .
93. Sometimes, when © opens upon or £ upon d, the ©
and £, are suppressed and the letter 6 substituted in their
' gtead; as, for •KOqpCtt, so assa, write C&CE3, svassn, he. to him;
for anu-'fi, anveti, he follows or accompanies ;
"but in the following instances the letter© is not substituted,
though the vowels © and £ be suppressed ; as, catfer Oflfcxj,
tayo assu, three sorrows , becomes e»crC3g> tay’assu; t3*®*g*?od
ibS)^ sametu tiya?m&, t3*®«oat2S>3, sainet’ayasma, let there be
peace , O charitable one !
24. Sometimes the letter ^ is substituted instead of0 for the
facility of pronunciation ; as, for §0^e/. •* idha aljaM* is writtc n
f idftl »m, here I am , the tf of being made long Jby
r No. 19; but the 0 in §0C?©> idha eva, which by No. 17, ‘
■* «»
"’betoms *©0©> idh’e**, here just, undergoes no change because
there is no difficulty in the pronunciation. * - ;
So also, for the facility of pronunciation, the 0 in $0t£e5©
Digitized by
Google
P4U GUAtfMAJl^ 11
•£), idha bliikkha ve* is chauged intq $ as |£^SQ#©0 i4a bliik-
khave, here, O priests !
.25. Iff opens upon f (he letter eflis sometimes substituted
instead of the former vowel; as, for pati-autaM, is
written «»*«**», patyantaM, approaching the end \ the ®1S tya,
of which is also sometimes changed into ©, cca, when the word
is converted into paccantaM ; and for
vutti assa, is written g*5X5a*e£3, vultyassa, his state .
r pati-aggi, however does not undergo a similar
change, but (he co is changed into© and the word becomes c©
pajnaggi, and afterwards by No. 17 oScacsS, paj>aggi, fire
rekindling .
# 26. Sometimes when qO opens upon © the qo is changed into
f , and instead of the ©, 8 is substituted ; as, for crt©;©£), yatha
eva, is writlen a3©?©, yathariva; but sometimes o0*<3©,
yatli’eva Just as, is written by No. 17. *
27. The letters at, ©, ®, <*>, <*, 0, &>, are augments, 90CB
#©0, agatno, and are used in uniting vowels whether similar
$r dissimilar ; as, for
«Df ®cX3, naimassa, is written nayiinassa,*
eSqpaow, ti-agjgikaM, **© tivaggikaM,+
lal}u essati, )&>, lal^umessati, J
cpt5K5>qp<5©*, atta atthaiu, attadatlhaM,||
f ito Ayati, f itonayali,§
t cot2©^)f *JD, tasma ii}a, )»££>, tasinaliija,!
t3S?o©©i sabbhi eva, C a^Six*©, sabbhireva,** :
cha abhinn&, chalabhinnd ? +t
£$©©, puthaeva, eds>c»£, puthageva,^
^©©, pa eva, pageva,§§
ip which last example the final vowel of the first word is made
* Not to this, t having thee matters . { ease approaches .
j| soar/ prospering. % the after time. H therefore here. **even
Xfiilh the good man. 1 1 six kinds of wisdom (peculiar lo the 1 apa-
ayas.) even se per ate. . ^ Jirst of all.
tAtt ^ xir ir a r.
It
•horf. But sometime the tflfeer U*t words are used witlhnrt v
the intervention of augment-. — Note. When augment# arm
used the vowels do not undergo the changes specified in the
foregoing Buies.
28. In words compounded with the preposition abhf, that
particle is changed into ep$GD, ahbhn : as, for ab-
hi*uggato, is written &bbhuggtitOj ascended on high f
the finar w of <*{&£>, abba, being suppressed by No. 17.
29. When a vowel immediately precedes a consonant the
vowel is often suppressed, and an augment substituted ill its
stead ; as, Tor
#ts:caattD, eobbikkhu^ is written C3t£«JS}, sabhikkhu,*
«©«sn©#, kacci nu tVaM, kaccinotvaait
dS#w®en*, j&neiua taM, j&nerautaM,f
from which examples it appears that in some instances, where
& is suppressed cp is the substituded augment; where £, ®; and
where cp, but in the words ® wd §) Jo, so muni, that saint, the
&> is not suppressed.
* 30* In words where the fourth and second consonants of the
CR&weseft), ka-vaggo, viz. €0, and £), occur the third and
first consonants pf the same class, viz. c so, end eso are
respectively united and form one double consonant ; as, for
C^ttoecso, U'ghoso, is written ugghosoj
o, dkhktaM, a-kkh&taM,$
in which last example, the QpO is made short; as, in the word
C3O0Q, pleva, No. 27.
31. When the vowel w opens upon a consonant, it is, in some
cases, suppressed and the. augment S> introduced in its stead ;
as, for ,
C30C3£*rtS3*, para salassaM, is written t5etfot3&>eaC*, pare*
ea^ass&M, above a thousand
atippakho, which by No. 27. becomes qSvCOs*
• That priest. + from whence then. $ me knew that. R high
tomding. % very public.
Digitized by LjOOQle
PAIrl BRiliHil. IS
a*i-ppapakh«,ie written wwae»«MO©9, ati-ppagokho,
very early , (spoken of time in general-)
dti Sometimes the inseparable preposition ^8, ava, is changed
into S> o ; as, for o©eft»©», ara-naaSo, is written S)ft99&9,
ohat* So,frmly bound .
But in the word 't&tgtXS «2, ava-sussatu, let it dry, no change
tabes place.
S3. The character * w, when it precedes a consonant of either of
the fire classes, may be changed into the nasal oteach class res*
pectirely ; as, for
£*«sotar, kill ka to, is written crnQsmsen'J, kigkato,*
Q»st*cD v sanjato, waa»ca6wew, commonly
Written tscftoeso, sanjfito,f
saM frhito, t8^3*»:,sanJ»hito.^
«*£>»>, tail dhanaiw, ®6B)e».> tandbaa<iM,|} .
tx > taM mittaH, 4»9®«SOW, tamiuittan
hut in the words ene»*«K@0«, na tats kammaa, not that work t
the mutation cannot take place.
34. When • precedes the 0» it is changed into that letter; as,
for puMlifgan, is written pulliggait, mascu-
line gender.
35. When • precedes a vowel, it is frequently suppressed and
© or ^ substituted in its stead ; as, for
<58»qpt», evan assa, is written GQ&cXi, eratnassa, this to hinu
elan avoca, Oo3^»8o©,etudavoca, this he said.
But « undergoes no change in the words man*
sjini, he conquered me.
3(1. When * precedes €5 or to, it is frequently changed into
3a, ' which in some cases is doubled ; as, for <o*d8,
tasteva, is written tn^asqns^&, taSneva, even that, which may
also be written <»•«;&, tameva, by the preceeding Hale.
WWW *r*».M*AvSMWS *
• having made what. + produced 1 well standing, , it those
riches. $ that friend.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
ft PALI GRAMMAR.:
♦ taM^i, but that, is written tanl)i, hut w.£ v
is equally proper. *
/J 37. When • precedes o3, both are frequently suppressed, and
$3% or when doubled substituted in tlieir stead ; for
t3**>c30£cfc0, sawyogo, is written t3®®5£^}©C£D^sannogo, union
or coalition;, but it may likewise remain unchanged.
38. Sometimes • is introduced as an augment before an initial
vowel or consonant; as, for cakkhu aniccaM, ©#©•
**§©•> cakkhuM aniccaM, the eye (is) vain; for q£)Qe<S0,
ava siro, cp 0.fi I'd, avaMsiro, head downward .
39. Sometimes when • precedes a vowel it is suppressed;
ae, for-Ss*^^^X 55 ^viduriaM aggam, is written 0a*K>:5X5> vidu-
i to the wise valuable ; tasaM al)gaM, en.csoto*
tdsaijaM to them I: the ep of being made long by No. 19.
40. When • precedes a consonant it is frequently suppressed;
as, for £}©**> C30t3^«, BuddhanaM sasanaw, is written ©Si
BuddhanasasanaM, the institutions of Buddho ; t3»
©cftO, saM rago, t£Otfo»>c5iD, s4rago, subject to (human) passions *
the £3 being made long by another rule.
41. When • precedes a towel, the vowel is sometimes
suppressed; as, for bijaM iva, is written @ byaMva,
as seed.
42. When • precedes a vowel, and that vowel is followed by
C3C5, the vowel being suppressed by the foregoing Rule, the
is necessarily changed into C3 in order to unite the two words ;
as, for ©0*¥CSC3,evaM assa, is written 0©*C3, eva^sa, thus to him •
43. When $ opens upon 0 or cp it is suppressed, and the
letter cd substituted in its stead; and if that letter happens to
be preceded by it becomes if by Q, it becomes which
g* is again changed into C3 as the £)* is into €§§) ; and both
tf and €§§) are occasionally doubled by No. 36 ; as, for
cfl$0e>, yadi evaM, is written c3®t*?0*, jajjevaM, if thus;
and «>© bodhi-agga, bojjhaggk, the cwa*
toms of Buddho.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALIORAUMAir.
15
44. When f opens upon ?5, it is changed into as, and if the f
be in combination with d the d is also changed into a 3 ; as,
for pari esani, is written cavnesn, payyesani,
diligent research.
J
45. The word GStfeo, sarati, is changed into w, sumarati,
(he; remembers , by substituting w for W and introducing
the augment » . By substituting © for $ the word festSQ*
' iti evaii, becomes #•§£)£>, itvevaM, thus.
461 s& itthi, that woman, becomes •t3oa§, sottki, by
suppressing the vowel 9 and changing the ep of t 3 D into j©.
47. ©ew«5i?> busa eva, becomes ©C3©8,busamiva,o6unddw%,
by suppressing 1 the final cpo of ©wo, bus&, introducing the
augment & and changing the C5 of 00 , eva, into
48. ©*jd<*© 3»>£)^ baljuahadho, becomes ©0e£>O©o®>£)%
-bav^dliadho, great sickness , by changing the Q into €> and
transposing the (so and 0 .
‘ 49 . qp§ 3 ty«o 0 9 ndhi-abhavi, l>ecomes qBoccS, addhibhavi,
(he) certainly was, by changing qp£)r adhi, into qp®, addha, which
is made long by No. 19.
50. C3 ©•£-25j£>5<5>©0 9 sukhaM dukkhaM jivo, becomes too©
£®«©*?o 0 , sukhedukkhejive, in health in sickness , by changing
' ♦ and S) into 0 .
51. The words t?8 e©o®Qo 9 pari-bodho, and W<£c, 6 >to 0 , pari-
da^o, become respectively w< 2 «>© 0 eQ 0 9 paiibodho, accusation,
and w SqovCsoo, parila^o, very hot; by changing, for the sake
of elegance, the 8 of the lirst word into (§ and the c, of the
second into 00
52. The words ®"¥*£3fi©S)»t3c ?^£.« 9 maM Buddhan
sarasaM, become ®®qp\co6©®®C3(54*©, mamaljasi Buddham
sara nsw, to me was the favour of Buddho , the . being changed
‘into®. This change however is very rare and the Words a>®
• qp&> £?, mam a] asi, are forbidden to be pronounced or written
as 0 W, mama^asi.
53. tfc® deft?) ta»i imina, becomes tadamin£, in
Digitized by
TA Lt ffRAMMAK,
w
jAif manner, $ being crabetituted instead of * fey. No. 35, and
r the $ of f ®«sw, itnif)& v being changed into
f * 54. ©£>f ' evaii iuiRM, fAitt Mw, and ki« al>a« #
what (am) 7, are changed respectively into evyn)av r
itow&ta, the • of £0* 9 evaM> being suppressed and the
. y> of f©») iiMH^changed into £, ; and the f and * of «£# »***
■suppressed, and the <p of «Nc« changed into ©.
55. Sometimes letter* are suppressed for the purpose of
facilitating- pronunciation, and sometime# in order to preserve
the metre $ as, for
eSt3»©oofl®jM»s®t3l, pefrisankhfiyaycMUse,
is written
cj©5?»S)o®cao y, papisaukhkyoniso,
(he) reflected with wisdom, or thought wisely,
the off, of the first word being suppressed for the facility
of pronunciation.
^©o^rc 3<; cysts flc*aQS>«5*3, alfipnnisidanti, silaplavanti,
is written
Qoejw&qcyxS 6c Jii S^ 0 ' |, ^> lapuni sidaati sila plavAoti,
gourds sink , and stones float ,
the <p of the first word being suppressed for the sake of
the metre, which requires that the line should consist of eleven
syllables.
Sometimes also letters undergo changes, in order to pa#*
serve the Rhythm ; as, for
<ytmo®C$>Pt03>CD <krSml)& sete kiccau,
is written
9*s>06K9O®«o&&., 5kftraml)5 sate kiccatt,
w e have done your work,
the ®W,se, being changed into « for the sake of the Rhythm.
56. Vote. Metre. called tf«#J®e30,chandas is whatever **
written in a regular number of -syllables from one to twenty six.
Measure or Rhythm, termed tjQXS, vutti, is the dis-
tinction of syllables into long and short, QS6, guru,
laghu.
Digitized by LjOOQle
GRAMMAR.
17
57. ep, a, is long by nature; but the 9 $ of qiC3C?» 4^?, which
k short by nature becomes long, from its preceding a, double
consonant. The ep ot <*• is also long, because it precedes . qp
ft is short. .The above are example of long and abort syllables.
58. There are two causes which prevent the coalition, of
vowgl* pr consonant# »—?one is termed 8003
varNNavyavadlianaM, impediment from a letter ; as, @*qptS33<9,
WiRlii^bii, to vie. was, which by .reason of the * cannot be
written ©©iftOfl, maraatjasi the other is termed «A30W
©Qj« 93., kala-vyavadhinaat, impediment from a rest; as,
tfinWQofcX*, jana-appamidaM, which cannot bo written
tSkaoets®^* jaoappamadaN.
CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. i
59. The following is an art ifical arrangement of the several
cases, but with a few exceptions they are not applied in that
state to any noun whatever ; the proper terminations will bp
shewn afterwards.
Sing. Plural.
Case 1. 6 «>o50 e?2>©0 8 tosnqj?, pajihami-vibhakti.
2.
<S> 3(30
- gwcoo —
duti>$
S.
4930
Cfi
taeaooa — ;
tattyi
4.
CS
«Oe‘
©^sS —
catutthi
5
C©3
eB
e.*e® — r
pancami
6.
C3
tfes —
— chaf)j)hl
7.
t?®*
S3
cJ
C3C5JO ®— «-
— sattamf
8.
e
«a3C— ■
•epo gew -
i^panaM*
The 1st. is the Nominative Case.
* This in the Pali Grammar is classed with the first case, but b dis-
tinguished from it by a servile CP.
a
Die - by LjOOQ ie
18
PALI GRAMMAR.
The 2nd is the Accusative Case.
3rd may be denominated the Instrumental Case*, bavitqf
the force of the sign by, or with .
4th is the proper Dative Case, with the sign to
5th is the Ablative Case, ivith the sign from
6th is the proper Genitive or Possessive Case, with the i
sign of, or belonging to
7th may be called the Locative Case with the sign tit or on
8th is the Vocative Case.
FIRST DECLENSION.
Nouns Masculine in ©, the crude form of which end in cf.
~ 60. In this Declension the following changes are made m
the artificial arrangement of the Cases*.
\ Singular.
1. 6 is changed into ©.
2. cp undergoes no change.
3. er . o is changed into'tdeo.
4. w is changed into epos. or into the to being doubled \
5. may be either used in that form or changed into tf> 9
or into ©&>0.
6. tr i* changed into Cte
7. c may be either used in that form or changed into tl
or ©&j.
8. 8 is suppressed, and the final qp sometimes converted in-
to op and sometimes remains ^unchanged.
Plural.
1. ©c 30 is changed into ep.
2. gcoi is changed info *9.
8. $ sometimes remains unchanged, and sometimes is con-
verted into co, the final ep preceding the termination being in
both instances changed into c$.
4. er* undergoes no change but the final tf preceding the
termination is made long.
5. _ <8 sometimes remains unchanged, and sometimes is con-
verted into co, the final cp preceding the termination, being in
both instances changed into c9.
6. «• undergoes n > change, but the final q> preceding the
termination. is made long.
7. g remains unchanged, but the final ep preceding the ter-
mination is converted intoc$,
8. gg 39 is changed into cp*
Digitized by LjOOQle
PALI GRAMMAR*
19
©}®0? 5 Buddho, declined*
Sing* Plur.
Case 1. ©g© 0, buddho.
c-l
2. ©0*, buddhaM,
3. 6)*©«o, buddhena,
^ 4. ©0Oo (% buddhaya,
S}0!33, buddhassa,
5. ©0ca3)O, buddhasme,
©0Q> buddha,
©0©E5O3, buddhamlja,
6. ©0:33) buddha&sa,
7. ©0eoS*, buddhasmiM,
©£©* buddhe,
©0®&; 9 buddhamhi,
©03 buddha, Buddho .
^®0, buddhe, Buddho .
€?«>©<£, buddhel)i, ©<3>0«?*
buddhebhi, by or with Buddho .
6)0O*5>, huddh&naM, to
Buddho.
©e)0&, huddhet>i, ©«0t3,
buddhebhi, from BuddhA
©00^50*, buddhanaM, of
Buddho.
©®3tt, buddhesu, in or on
<u 9
Buddho .
8. ©0, buddha, £}0j,buddh&. ©0; 3 buddha, O Buddho!
61. According to this Example are declined,
sLijo, a lion. nikayo, collection. ej3@>^5^5},
kaNNo, an ear. tt&qjo, saddo, a voice. <s>a*o*c»o, rogo, disease.
nado, a sound. pabbato, a mountain. <f0<53
#>@o,aramo, a' garden. deso, ti country. epOW® t30,
Akdso, the atmosphere . dipo, an t3**5»3, saggo,
heaven, qo'oo^tfo, aljiro, ^/borf. rukkho, a tree #
s>« 35 >C 30 , keso, Afl/r. K<Ss>oc0j suriyo, /Ac swn. coosc,. p&do,
a foot. ©«>«2Kj6, cando, the moon , e^SOO, padipo, a lamp. &f
«>W0, l)aMs o 9 a goose.
Anomalies in qp.
62. The native grammarians refer the following class of nouns
masculine in ep as anomalies to this Declension, because in the
crude or imaginary form, in which they are usually quoted,
they end in <f short, like the preceding class j but are declined
Digitized by
Google
PA Ei I fenAttMAft.
to)
with different terminations ; the artificial arrangement, formerly
alluded to undergoing the following changes for the declension
of those nouns.
Singular.
.1.6 is changed into cp.
2. cf* sometimes remains unchanged and sometimes is
converted into ep y;*'
3. <' o sometimes remains unchanged and sometimes is
changed into
4. « i* changed into
5. t&)) is sometimes used and sometimes changed into
e*;o or
(j. c 5 . is changed into ©^ro.
7. «§•. may either be used or may be changed into
or into
8. 6 is suppressed, and the final cp sometimes converted
into <p, and sometimes remains unchanged.
Plural.
1. ©c3*>. is changed into epeeagu
2. ©c so. . - *p©<y:o.
3. *8 sometimes remains unchanged, and is sometimes
Converted into t§, the final qp preceding the termination being
changed into cp^, and the final cp of cp^ being changed into
4. undergoes no change, but the final cp preceding
the termination is made long.
5. *8 same as 3d. case.
6. same as 4th case.
7. eg remains unchanged, but the final qp preceding the
termination is changed [nto cpeo, and the final cp *bf $p^> into *9.
8» c c3o is changed into cp©^r:D*
qpt53fOJ ) atta, the Souh declined*
Sing.
Case 1. q*5K5j?>atta,
2. cpoosoeft*, attanaM,
attaM,
3. attena,
ept5XE«*0,'attana,
If qpOX35^€^?5 ^ttano,
Plur.
qzssyftevrty attana
<ft5xm«*)0,aUano.
attanebhi.
<55367, attauelji.
<P*53w«at>, attanajH.
Digitized by
TAhl GRAMMAR.
si
Sing.
5. ^t®t5.ej®0,attasm&,
<y*5)Q TOO, attand,
DO, attanr a,
6. at tana,
7. ^S^ttSKattasmiM,
attamlji,
attain*,
8. 9*5X5), atta,
qaio^alta.
Plur,
attaneblii.
9QX53®t«555, at(anel)i.
attanaM.
attane^u.
9*5X5i:>®«tf)> atlano.
<50CS>, r&ja, A*7?g- declined.
Sing.
Plur.
1. tfocJi, raj&,
2. <5oc^«r-, rajanaM,
, d'orf., r&jaM,
3. O'«5^25^0, ragna,
rajena,
4. cr^esgss^, ranno,
<5oi?s>«^, raj i mo,
tfO*5eX3, rajassa,
5. o*£3^ ^0 ranna,
rajamha,
tf0t5t3§)D, rAjasmd,
6. asthe4th.
7* cr*es$z5$. ranne,
tfO dT «?, raj an i,
Cfoc5*®£5D, lajaml)!,
cTOOS^^, rajdno.
<*oete«*D, rajano.
crotfeB, r&jubhi
o'O^&D, raju])i
oo^e^ro, rajebhi
(SldCfyi, rajel)t.
ranna M, ri?
junaM, cfoe*>«5>, rajanafe, '
as the 3d case
as the 4th case,
rajusu.
(SO^tf rajesu.
tfO^Sl^OO, ra:ano.
Ood t3^«, rajasmiM, .
8. O'Od', raja,
cTCCi, raja,
63. The noun masculine brahma. « Brahmin, U d*
lijined like qaJOJO, altd, except in the following cases.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
92
PALI CBAMMAK.
Plur.
braljroebhi.
bra^me^i,
^D««, brahmunan
bra^mina*.
as the 3rd.
as tbe 4th.
C3, braljmesu.
tc©3, sakh&, a friend , is also irregular and is declined like
altfi.
64. Participial and other attributives formed by the affixes 9
or © and cooj, the former of which becomes 00 and the latter
©0 in the nominative by changing into or, and suppress-
ing the technical nominative are considered as nouns in
end when masculine are declined with the following ter-
nations.
Singular.
1. .fi.'is suppressed and erjojt changed into ep.
2. cf* remains unchanged, but the <5 of o.£5» is changed
into tf y which agajn is suppressed before this termination.
3. 0 and are both suppressed and substituted
in their stead; or i9 charged into and the £ of ojc5J
being changed into is suppressed before that termination.
4. re and are both suppressed and ©<sx> substituted
in their stead, or the cs being doubled the £ of oiO^is
changed into ep.
. 5. is changed into >ena which together with <53CMs
•oppressed and «?o substituted in their stead, or c$Sb and op-
tionally ®££» may remain unchanged the of being
changed into ep before these terminations.
6. as the 4th case.
7. and ojo^are both suppressed and & substituted
in their stead ; or «e3* being changed into cf the £ of &X5) is
changed into cf and that cf suppressed before the termination or
and optionally may remain unchanged, the £ of
being changed into cf, and that suppressed as above.
. Sing.
3. ^®CID©^>d, braljmena,
braljmand,
6 ^*d5)«*do, braljmuna,
4 . braljmuno,
bralpmassa,
5. ^iaStiSto, bral^masm^,
0, bral}maml)a,
braljniuna,
6. as the 4ib.
T. as cfQXft), altd,
Digitized by
Google
*AM GRAMMAS. S8
S. S. and gxs are both suppressed and changed into ;
• or ep . .
Plural.
1. ectt. is suppressed, and the <$ of eneg changed into S>
and sometimes the £ of is suppressed and the ezo changed
into
2 . &c: 9 - is changed into <$, and the <~ of eftCBjs changed
into <f which again is suppressed before this termination.
3. *8 or optionally &> undergo no change, but the q of
is changed into ana that cp is again changed into e.
4. -eo*, is suppressed and substituted in its stead; or «•
remains unchanged and the <$ of eneg is changed into q, which
again is made long before the termination.
5. as the 3d case.
6 . as the 4th case.
7. g remains unchanged but the $ of eftCB is changed into
and that 9 into & before the termination.
8 . &cc 9 . undergoes the same changes as in (he 1 st case*
gUNava, Virtuous . declined.
Sing. PJur.
Case 1 . cg^ogo, guNavS, gawavanto.
gUNavanti.
2. cg4&g)c5X£*, gUNavantaM, guNavante.
3. cg4$Qca:>,gu:savata, guNavantC-
cg^Q*>c5^5JW 3 guNavantene, bhi, eg^*0§>*53OJ&:, guNa-
Vantel}i.
4, cg^©©»50,guNavato, <g4S*>©c&% guNavataM,
guNavattassa, cg^©c5y»'D«5j*> guNavanti-
5. cg^Soao, guNavata,
<gew0ox»©C5D3,guNHvantam*
J)^i
gtiNavantas-
/ md,
6 . as the 4th case.
7. cg^Qw, guNavati,
• eg guNavante,
<^^©<-QC5.@do, guNavantam*
lu
<g^S<5X55t3®* # guitavantas-
mia,
nan.
<g^0^c5%»tB,guNavantebhi f
guNavautel}i.
as the 4th case.
gunaTantostt.
Digitized by LjOOQ le
PALI GEAMMARf.
Sing.
8. og4S6£*, guNavaM,
<g4w0, gusava,
sg> 4^900, guNavd,
According to this example are declined,
©8300, maghava, sacraya. ©Oe^je)^, khdnuma, having pillars*
d<?©9» phalavd, fruitful . «£(*©', kulavvd, lineal . £>€D©0,
dhanava, r/c/i. t5O$30o, bhagavd, illustrious • <£t30o yasava,
famed . ©O©0, balavd, strong. cge»0o, sutava, a>e// informed.
t2«5£25£0O, pannavd, a?wr. r*>£©0, Ijimavd, frost.
dhitima, courageous. t 3<50', sllavd, obedient, mutimd,
sensible . tsSgo, satima, thoughtful • tS<5®0, t)irima, bashful .
csoogOi gatima, travelling . do?®?, raliina, lustful , longing
after. c£&®o, jutin.a, resplendent. d)5«0, thuthima, praise
worthy . L2©§0, suciina, jowre. oacago. yatima, helpful. ®Q3
go, balima, offerings receiving. «3(3@0, kalima, sinful, zxQ
©?, kasima, husbandman . (Jl©®?, rucima, wishful , desirous .
©Si)o, buddhimd, awsc. ©35© ®\ cakkhuma, discovering,
penetrating. ©ScD^O, bandhutna, relating to. e>«j3g® ) ke-
tuma, banner. lefuma, lucky, fnt unate. t5D3«j:®o t
bhanuma , ' passing rays (the Sun.) , rajjUtua, chained^
bound \ (as with f iters.) fed8®0, vijjumd, lightning.
65. Participial nouns formed by the affix o ^53 nt a, are classed
with nouns in cp and when masculine are declined with the
following termination.
Singular.
Case 1. 8 is suppressed and changed into ep* or < 53 dl re-
mains unchanged and 8 is converted into S)
Plural.
1. eo3o is changed into cp, <5003 remaining unchanged* .
The rest of the changes' in the technical ter mi nations
Exactly the same as those laid down in pages 22. 23*
Plur.
as the 1st.
Digitized by LjOOQ le
r*M GRAMMAR*
fcfe 4>i facehaM, Going , declined*
Sing* Plur.
i. gacchaM, &XX$i gacchanta*
gacchafttO)
S. coSsfcnoa., gacchantait, «© rfeent*, gacchante,
3. «0c*«o, gacchatd, t»8tf eeJMS^) gacchantebhi,
c£8rf®c«a»«*D,!>accharitena> (£6rf®<ffX»*8, garchantepi.
4. CKO^'S'aoij gacchato, <c6tf aj*, gacchtaM,
Cft^<53t55cac3, gacchantassa, cc©s5'<5xs>0««*, gacchanUnax.
5. ssS^wo, gacchatfi, as the 3rd case*
CRt«5<5M3»®tSD0,gacchantam*
tRSc5«r»C3S)3,gacchantasm£,
■. ' 6. as the 4th case. as the 4th cash*
7; tfcSaed, gacchati, gacchail&lkt.
«8tf #<?*», gacchante, 1
m&S csxxQtS, gacchantfim*
i>i,
M:0tf<03SaC36* t gacchantas*
min,
8. »£«■•, gacchaM, criB£««5X)tt) gacchanto.
gaccha, ce8t£ctt»0, gacchant*.
<»©ef3, gacchfi,
According to this example are declined)
®i£)‘, maljBM, offering. &td*, tipphaM, standing.
bhunjaM, rating., 68*. paCaM, cooking. jira»i, decaying.
#aJ*) rmyaM, dying. «*£)*, kubbaM, doing. £Cf», vajaM r go*
ing. ©6*, CaraM, moving. ^*, dadaM , giving. S«?*, suuax.
aslddg. «fo3* ( jayaM, overcoming. tScr*, saraM, remembering,
efo*, japaM, reading.
End of the first declension of nouns masculine in ©, the erode -
form of which end in tf.
j>
( Digitized by
Google
mi 6BAXXA1*
9&
SECOND DECLfiNSlON.
66. Nouns masculine in f .•
In this declension the technical termination! undergo th*
following changes* , '
Singular.
1. 8 is suppressed.
2 cf* is changed into •.
3. 'cno remains unchanged.
4. so is either changed into oen? or doubled.
5. tSeft or optionally S£&, .may either remain unchanged or
be converted into enj.
6. as the 4tb case.
7 C3®» or optionally €&* may either remainunchanged or
be converted into
8. 8 is suppressed.
Plural.
1. <?: 9 . is suppressed and the final $ made long, or the oo e* is
retained and the final j suppressed.
2. as the 1st case. *
3. t8 or optionally remain unchanged, but the final g pre»
ceding these terminations is made long.
4. remains unchanged, but the final f preceding the
termination is made long.
5. as i he 3rd case.
6. as the 4tb case.
7. remains unchanged but the final f preceding the ter^
urination is made long.
8. ©clot as the 1st case.
9ing.
W$8r t aggi, Fire, declined.
Plur.
I. tfsxh, aggf, tfta&i aggi, <*c«55.aJ3, aggay^
S. aggltf, ' .
3 * <fC5X§W9*aggina* % a ggfhhl f
aggli^i.
4. aggino, qC9C&&v*» agginan r
tyCSX£5t£3, aggissa,
5. aggini, as the 3rd case.
aggimhfi,
ag^isma,
6. as the 4th case. as the 4th ease.
* The characteristic letter used by grammarian* to denote this declfcneiMi
Digitized by
Google
mt
fu-
sing. PW.
7 . 9C0&03, aggini, *oa»3S, aggisu.
tfcaSfsxSSj iiggiiiilii,
Sf&&X0&, aggisiniM,
®. tfCSXfi, aggi, 0c«8, aggf, 93tt>»#o», aggayo.
Like cpcsobare declined die following nouna masculine in f.
««SS,joti, splendour. c©<^*§, gaNj>hi, a knob, a knot. ®e%
mu£f)hi, <Aej£*/. «B»eeiS, kuccbi, the ct»§, salt, a sortof
paddy {mountain.) Ot», vlbi, a sort of paddy (field.) ©®Q,
Tyadhi, a disMtH. &c3,«dhi, limit. ^©30, brxihi, the pee-
pul, ( Ficus religioso.) CJwfo, saudbi, a joint. c5:<9, riUi, a heap v
^9, di pi, a sort of tiger. isi, a Rishi ( a sort of saint.) ®« 2 ,
muni, an ascetic. ®«P,.n<ani, a jewel. Q-w?, dhani, the voice.
£8, giri, a rock . cfS, ravi, the Sun. «©, kavi, a poem.
kapi, a monkey . <p(3, asi, a ezeord. masi, soo/. <e£)£) f
nidhi, a 1 casket . ©S5> vidhi, mode or manner . a^i, a w-
pen/. oS } pati, n ford or master . l}.ari, n name o/ Vishnu a
ari, an enemy. £>&, timi, darfcnm. W<3, kali, 5 //?. ©<§,
bali, an offering. &Q&Q, julauidbi, the Sea. gal) a pa ti,
the head of a house. varamati, grew/ wisdom .
S, nirupadhi, no/ 4orn again. epS lo:, adhipati, iAn/1
67. According to tl^e foregoing example, are declined all noun*
masculine in f, with the exception of Adi, beginning}
which forma the 7th case in a different manner; viz.
Singular.
fc 3 ©. being suppressed, and cp* whidh is afterwards eon*
verted into • being substituted; or e?§U being converted into £ 0
Plural.
tt The final f preceding the termination t£ remains without
alteration, as,
Sing. Plur.
Case 7. *0?*,4diM, epO*C,, 4do #
ddimlji, iiisu > idisii.
4^0^C3©^adisniiflr f
J5j* 4 of the second dedeaston^ of nouns masculine in f.
Digitized by
rALr Gft'AttMAft*
fHIRO OBCLRNSlOir.
6& Nouns mustuline in dr*
Attribute* of possesion formed by the affixes 1 <J*, and 0, if
masculine, are of this declension, in which the technical ter mi*
nations undergo the following changes.
Singular
1. 8 is suppressed,
0. <*• is either converted into • Or into and the final &
preceding these terminations is made short.
3L eoo remains unchanged, but the final d 1 preceding the ter*
mination is made short. ***»
4. to is either changed into on doubled,’ the^final & pre*
ceding the terminations being in both instances made short.
t 5. or optionally ©C£u may either remain unchanged or
be converted into the final & preceding the&e termination*
being made short.
' 6, as the 4th ease. ■ -
. 7. «§• or optionally &$> 9 may either remain unchanged or
be converted into <£$, the final dr preceding these terminations
being made short.
8* 8 is suppressed and the final (5 s made short
Plural
1. &c?o is either spppresed or changed into Gcrjo, and the
final preceding that termination changed into $ .
1 f. as the 1st case.
3. (8 or optionally to remains unchanged.
4f remains unchanged.
5. tS or dptionally c3 remains unchanged.
< 6. as the 4th case,
7. g remains unchanged,.
8. as the 1st case.
^©, daw Si, zoAo pnrriVs a kind of pilgrim declined,
Sing. Piur-
1. dawSf, <J© f dawSi,
da n Si no.
\
0. daNSinaM^
^©•, daNSiM,
3- daNSind, daNSibhj,
^©<£>, daNgihi,
a Thechnfacteriitic letter ufed hv grammarians to denote U*i* dralestiag
il also
Digitized by *
Mll GRAMMAR.
Sing, Plur.
4 . da n Si no, ^©e»«, dao${aaM,
* <©J3C8, daNgiasa, ..."
5. -^©?sw, danSinS, <©«5, daw Si Mu,
daN5in»l)4, danSliji,
<t©tt©J, daNSisuid,
6. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
T. $©«5^dani$inf, <£©C3, daaStsu.
*©©«>, daNSiml)i,
^©tt®*, daNSismiM,
8. ^©, daN$i, as the 1st ease.
According to the above example are declined ilia following
attributive nouns,
080, dhammi, righteous . ts.8, sauglit, congregated.
*3S nani, mwe* hatthi, having hands. ©«&©, cakkhf,
having c^es. C3«®, pakkhi, the ' winged. C,S» daf)hl, having
teeth, eftb, raf>f>hi, having • tS’ad* chatthi, umbrella*
infill, Me flower adorned. 080, vara ini, tvA&e on/ having. #c$3
3, yogi, an ascetic. toadS, bhfigi, ( /ortottale. ^ bhogi, Me
WcA. kfirni, lecherous, tao®, sfimi, a fordL Qd?, dhajf,
standard bearer . gaul, Me congregate ft. $3 65, sasi, Me
Aore. «£€§, ku^hi, tf®, jami, platted hqir. ceo<3 f
yfinf, reposing. tt3, suklij, healthful, fi®, Rikhi, Me peacock.
danti, having teeth, ©eren, niantl, counsellor , •<£,
kari, having hands, ©oc®, cfigl, rewarder or one who makes pre*
sents. kusali, luck?/. |)e3<$, . musali, j?crt/e having*
©£, ball, strong. cn&esn8 } pfipakfirt, sinner. CttSX^SttS,
sattughfiii, murderer. ©CC*®^ mallakfiri, wrestler . (JOS#?),
dighajivi, fowg* /ivcA 08803?, dhamroavadl, sacred wrangler *
ti'JVW 0?, siljanadi, /ion voiced. tq®»oeS, bhurai&fisl, a re/wwen,
gStttfOoci, sighayfiyi, x»j/f mover.
J?od of the third declension, of doiiiis masculine in <$*,
Digitized by
Google
PALI •RABBtAY#'
90
' FOURTH DECLBNSlOlf,
69. Nouns masculine in £>.*
In this declension the technical terminations undergo the
following changes.
Singular.
I. 8 is suppressed.
2 cf« is changed into*.
3 . remains unchanged-
4. 5. 6. 7. undergo the same changes as the technical %er+
ruinations of the second declension.
8. 8 is suppressed.
Plural.
1. ecra is either changed into ©£'> and the final £ preceding tha$
termination into c?, or it is suppressed and the final q made long.
2. as the 1st case. _
3 . (8 or optionally & remains unchanged, but the 6n?l q pre*
ceding this termination is made long.
4. 5. 6. 7, as the singular.
8* as the 1st case with this addition, that e-o maj be changed
into e©, the final £ preceeding that termination being changed
into <j. ^
bhikkhu, A pricst 9 declined.
Sing. Plur.
1 t. taeag, bhikkhu, d&tf®s©o, bhikkhavo.
&as®, bhikkhu,
2. toes®*, bhikkhuM, bhikkhubhi^
S. bhikkhunS, bhikkhfi i. %
4 . bhikkhuno, bhikkhunaM,
t2C5 bhikklius^a,
5. bhikkhuni, as the 3rd case.
bhikkumsma,
bhikkhu
6. as the 4th case, as the 4th case.
7. bhikkhuni, bhikkhAsu.
t3eS®®^, bhikkhuipl)i,
t§#®e3©*, bhikkbusmiM,
8. bhikkhu, t3as®e©, bhikkhave* x
tD25®e©'3, bhikkhavo.
bhikkhu,
• The chancteiUlic letter used by grammarians t o denote tbit declension
^ O* Digitized by Google
mi GBAHHAJ*
111
tiike ire declined,
GtOQy setu, a bridge . •»<£, ketu, a Jwg dr standard.
tl61)u, a planet so called . bh&nu, Me Swn. t3*«, saiiku,
a pillary £©t^, u ^chu, rwgar cane. *&<%* velu, bambooy
tuaccu, murder . fiS5), sindliu, Me sea . ©£}, madhu, honey.
«>«3cri/, neru, a rocAr. #©tf i, meru, ma/ra mera. % £3*3X3^ satthu*
ft farf/ of dough, sowfty kfiru, shuttle fish. Ijetu, a case or
catae. jantu, o living kreature . too W, bhattu, a Aar-
&aiz£ ewt3W£, nettu, pouif. e>£30*8, sotu, a hearer .
*8, fi£tu, knowledge . eg, jetu, victory or conquest ,
bhetthu, a breaker . <,?8> dStu, a gwr. Qo^gj db&tu,
radtr. €*3«», nattu, grandson. ftS)o£}, boddhu, knowledge.
W?8, vinr&petu, notice of information.
According to the foregoing example are declined most houns
taasculiste in £; — but in the Stf? case jantu, a firtiig
creature, makes in the plural *f «*»•©, jantave, ef <3XS#©^
jantavo, d <3X5^ jantu, (like tt>cs£>, bhikkhu) and also dfaws
and t^<5X5jecfl% jantuyo,
€3<3d3, satthd, Buddha, and some other nouns masculine in
qp, are, in original works on grammar, usually referred to this
declension in £ because their crude form happens to terminate
in that vowel. The technical terminations in these instances
undergo the following changes; —
Singular
1* 8 is suppressed and the final £ changed intaep.
*• V remains unchanged but the final £ .preceding that ter*
urination is converted into cp<5\
3. is changed ep and the final £ preceding that terrai,
nation is changed info tp<S\
4. w in either suppressed or changed into oeno, or doubled.
5. C3©3 or optionally ©ODD may either remain unchanged or
be converted into which then undergoes the same changes
as in the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
7. or optionally @§t) mar either remain nilehartged, the
final £ preceding these terminations being changed into epd 9
Digitized by LjOOQ le
t Al\ GILA MWAH.
m
or it may be eon verted into f, the £ being changed into' $64
end the q> made short.
- 8. 3 is suppressed and the final <5 is changed either into <f. of
Plural,
1 . gcm is changed into ©,the final <5 being previously changed
into \
2. Oc:* is changed either into © dr the final <5 preceding
eadi of those terminations being changed into epd'.
• 3 . 18 or optionally tS 5 remains unchanged, but the <5 preceding
iheteterminatfons is changed into e p6 ; and the of 6 intocs*
4 . remains unchanged, but the final p preceding that
termination Is either changed into eptf and the inherent vowel
of 6 made long, or £ is changed into tf which is afterwards
made long.
5 . t8 or optionally «6 as the 3 rd case.
6. as the 4 th case.
7 . g remains unchanged, but the final £ preceding that ter*
ttination is changed into and the inherent vowel of the 4
jntotd.
8. as the 1st case.
. i
t3<s5o, satthi, one of the names of Buddko , declined.
Sing. .
1 t3<s5', sattlii,
8. taesdjcf^ satth&raMj
S. es-e&xft, sattb&i*
4. es«d, satthtf,
CSCJdawo, satthun<y,
teflSeaea, satthossa*
5 . as the 3 rd case.
6. as the 4 th case.
7. tsesdS, sattbarr,
8. e«d, sattha,
es<jd3, satthi,
Plur.
t 3 «doa< 50 j satthSro,
tscsdoecr, salth&re.
satthiro.
satthirebhi,
toCSSiaotS, satthirelji,
es«d359en«', satth&r&naK,
tScSdStfd*, satiMnax.
as the 3rd case,
as the 4 th case,
ertifiaatfes, satth&resu*
tscSiecrj, satthiro.
/
Digitized by
Google
*AtI fihAMMA*. S3
66. encdo, nattlii, is declined like Wad' 1 , satlhS : — as are
©eg, pitu, and tfcoag, bli&tu, Except that the termination tp#
ira, when applied to these last nouns is shortened into ara.
End of the fourth declension, nouns masculine in <$.
FIFTH DECLENSION.
■ Nouns masculine in £*•*
In this declension the technical terminations undergo the fol*
lbwing changes
Singular*
1. S is suppressed.
1 Mural.
1 ®o ;9 is either suppressed or changed into c€b, and the
final cp preceding that termination made short.
' The. rest of the technical terminations undergo the same
changes as in the fourth declension ; the being previously
converted into £,‘, wherever that vowel is not made long in lb#
declension ot «$«£), bhikkhu.
tf abhibhu, A chief, declined.
Sing. Flur.
1. q&g, abhibhu, qtS#, abhibhu,
«pStage£)3, abhibhu vo.
S. epStg*, abhibhu m,
3. eptSeg^O, abhibhuna, abhibhuhhi*
' abhibhuiji.
4. abhibhuno, ****** abhibh6na »-
epcBegtJCS, abliibhussa,
5. tytStgan 0, abhihhund, M ‘be 3rd case.
q§«g®tS>, abhibhumlja,
gttSSo, abhibhuami,
6. as the 4th case. as the 1th case.
4 The characteriific Uttar used by grammarian* to denota thia daclaoaioa
»o*
»
Digitized by
Google
Si
VA LI GRAMMAR.
Sing* Plur*
i. qtBtg©?£>, abhibhuml)i, abhibhusu*
qptBtgtol?-, abhibusmiM,
8 . as the 1st ease* «f*5Dtg«>0, abhibhuve.
cpt&tg^SO, abhibhuvo. *
qpsseg, abhibhu. <
According, to the above example are declined numerous
nouns in ; but in the word C3 ©£ 5 ^ 33 ^, sabbannu, the tech-
nical termination of the nominative and vocative plural Goft),
may r besides the regular changes, be converted into ; the
final preceding that termination being shortened. '
End of the fifth declension.
SIXTH DECLENSION,
In Bal&vataro the following monosyllabic and but &
very few others, make a separate declension, because their
crude form has a distinct termination viz* in 3).
In this, declension the technical terminations undergo the
following changes.
Singular.
1. 6 is suppressed.
2. remains unchanged; but the final © preceding that ter-
mination is changed into qo0 or cp8: and the inherent vowel of
0 in may be changed into <*.
3. is changed into and the final © preceding that
termination is converted into q>o0 or «f0-
4 ts is doubled, and the final © preceding that termination
changed into «^o0 or c?8.
5. C3©3 or optionally @&)o may either remain unchanged, or
be converted into zr; (lie final © preceding these' terminations
being changed into ep>0 or cp0.
6. as the 4th case*
7 C3®» or optionally ©S3 may either remain unchanged, or be
converted into td ; the final © preceding those terminations be-
ing changed into cpo0 or q-0. ,
8. as the 1st case.
Plural.
©<30 is changed into ©, the final © of oeoo, being previously
•hanged into ep^.
Digitized 6y
Google
FAT.1 GRAMMAR.
35
S. e<aO is changed into 65; the final 65 of ©eoo being previously
changed into qo0 or cp8.
3. t8 or optionally cB undergoes no change*
4. eft* is changed into cp*, and the final S preceding that ter-
mination changed into ep8; or the eft of is doubled and the
final 85 preceding that termination changed into £; or the ter-
mination ipa\ remain unchanged*
5. as the 3rd case.
6* as the 4th case.
7. £} remains unchanged ; but the final S5 preceding that ter-
mination may optionally be changed into epQ or <p8; the inhe-
rent vowel of 8 being changed into
8. as the 1st case.
Sing.
]• go.
2. CftO§*, g^VUM,
QfcOfi*, gavair,
•c&O go, An ox, declined.
Plur*
fj:o<5>Qo, gavo, '
«>o«©o, g^vo,
c»«£0, gavo.
«>©•, gavaM.
3* gavena,~
c ©»©«*), gavena.
4. t£0©et3, f gava8sa,
cfc©t£3, gavassa.
5. ccoSo, gava,
C£>03) gava,
«oo8®e©'5, gavaml)£,
«>©€X5D0, gavaml)&,
g&vasma,
c^©c5S», gavasma.
6. as the 4tb case.
7* gave,
cftoS, gave,
gobhi,
r * * •
&'£> gopl,
gavaM, cg^S^*, gURRix*
€K£0e**, goNaM.
as the 3rd case.
as the 4th case,
vue&tg, gavesu,
«&®>©C3, gavesu,
ctf)S©£5, givamlji, gesu.
Cfc£)®<£>, gavam^i,
«O0C3©*, givasmiM,
»£t3§)*, gavasmiM.
8. as the 1st case. as tine 1st case*
End of the sixth declension Nouns masculine.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
*
PALI GRAMMAR*
SEVENTH, declension.
Nouns feminine in CJO.*
In this declension the technical terminations undergo the
following changes;—
. Singular* $
*1. 6 is suppressed. •
2* « f remains unchanged; but the final cp preceding that ter*
inination is suppressed.
3. « 3 is changed into cpofi, the final cp preceding that ter-
mination being suppressed.*
4. to is changed into cpcs, the final ep preceding that termi-
nation being suppressed.
5. eS)o is changed into opes as above.
6. as the4thscase.
7. is changed either into <»• or into epos, the final cp pre*
ceding the latter termination being suppressed.
8* B is changed into the final cp preceding that ternuaa*
tion being suppressed.
Plural.
1. eeft may either be suppressed or not.
S . as the hrst*
3. & or optionally ts3 remains unchanged*
4. remains unchanged.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
7. £ remains unchanged.
-8. as the 1st ease.
*RG5*63$0, kannd, A virgin, declined,
Plur.
aatfSpBtO, karma,
kann&yo.
kannabhi,
»e55G55^0!S> kannahi.
kanr&naif,
as the 3rd case,
as the 4th case,
ax £^25^0 £3, kanndsu*
as the 1st case.
* The characteristic latter ased by gramraariaus la denote this dedeotiim
M C3*
feing.
1. kannd.
2 . kann&M.
3. $XG23§<£5^oo^ hannaya.
4* «)(35sj^oc3, kannaya.
5. «b^j5353o 3, kannaya.
6. as the 4th case,
7. exfc^ss^oa!*, kannd} aM }
kanndya*
8* «3*C£3£<23§, kanne.
Digitized by LjOOQie
PALI GBAMMA1U 9f
According to this example are declined, besides several
others, the following noons feminine in ep ;
t3©o, saddli£ r faith. taNpk, lust. *®OXXO, metli,
friendship . e>®Q% medha, understanding* 0«no, vina, a kind
of fiddle . ©0X550, mattk, quantity, penSa, wisdom.
f ©c5o, iccha, a well, sikkhl, discipline. ©tdffo, vijji*
science . w0t5'D, pijcchd, a question . tfcO3£)0, bhikkba, charity, boiled
rice begged^ by a Priest . ©cDOSO, cinta, thought • tf, eji»
/wsf. O'-cso, jaMgha, the leg. raant &, council. ©o«5? f
nidya, illusion. <S©?, giva, the neck s «S©toO f jivbk, the tongue.
•$©erO, devala, a goddess. Ilia* manner. ©00*0, v&chfi,
a zfioid. ©S0«w, vappakk, a ©s'?, ela, cardamon . tft
050, ch&ya, shadow . ®e©o£)o, god 1)4, Me g>s<a/f 4 . kelk, ,
Me moon's increase. qpOtOO, a»4, strong desire. ©Q0«»o, bal&kfit
the white crane . <K5®)C30, alambusd, a female deity so called.
gaiwg£, a river. C3cS*e30, parisa, jui/e, attendants • ®«£wo f
manjusa, a chest, woSo, n&va , a ship. t3t£0> sabha, an assembly.
disa, a country. c£0<9', gat ha, a verse. uk£, «
juN>a, Me (crescent) half moon . S, sena,
oit «rw?y. jfha, «I2 endeavour , ow attempt . lekr f
o sylvian avenue . <5* tor, laMka, Ceylon , ©CJcDo, vastidhi, earM-
too®'' 1 , s41a, o A«//. WOQOOO}, salaka, a swa// /were o/^ a»od i/red
/or 'counting R r numbering . £©?, vaca, a wf of saffron.
India, a cfavin* So^a»0, v6lukaj $<wtrf. ©<^3*S§>0, vafijha, 4
barren woman. khe!4, phlegm. flaJo, sikhd, ere#/,
(of birds.) tf0? f japa, plaited hair. erf, puja, 0/2 offering. 8
CWffiO, vi»4kh4, <1 /er>w o /' respect for females. $3©O f gliftpa, w*/-
ti(ude f ©©© 0 , k|)i$S$, « visikW, 4 Aire**.
#rfeSoj jepph6, achif. G^tao, pipa^a, M*Vs/. tso^jo, efikba,
a branch, otaofi)*, sowSa, o diunkmd. vedan4, /)ai« %
OOO, papd, an arrack shop. 1 ©*b©?, vita s 84, a fable, tofcs^zseo,
•nnnS, sign. slma^ boundary, karuNi, x&w-
passion. ®©»w? f cetan4, iwi/iA ©OK5J350, khattiya, a queet? y
©«3«dD, vanitd, a woman. e»Q**oo, tasina, lust . sresQtfo, sak*
hbwi, sugar candy, lal4, a Creeper. C5C<, paja, a mid*
Digitized by
Google
T ALT GRAMMAR.
iude of people . <8©^, tul4, a scale beam . hatha, a Aw-
loty, a speech . eejQp, nidd£, c/ccp. ©?)?, khamd, pardon .
wQo, 6udh&, ambrosia, tfoofl}, chaya, a shade. OqSo, vala--
irA, a tta'o, surd, toddy. OatSeno, vasana, happiness .
a palanquin. s sulas6, a female deity so
called. fl*C3ttO, siMsapi, cardamons . fl©o, silS, a stone. W>C3\
nisi, fAe nose. C2tt>3, pabhd, tfgAf. <$>^530, guljd, a caw. Qfiesw,
lasikd, brains.
End of the seventh declension.
EIGHTS DECLENSION.
JVbiiWs feminine in
In this declension the technical terminations undergo the
/ollowing chan ges
Singular,
1. 8 is suppressed.
2. tf is changed into •.
3. is changed into cca
4. to is changed into cao.
5. x C5§>0 is changed into ; which again is changed into o 6$.
6. as the 4th case
7. C3®» is changed either into o or csa.
8. as the 1st case.
Plural.
1. ecso either remains unchanged ; or is suppressed, and the
final $ made long.
2. as the 1st case. '
3. & or optionally t3 remains unchanged; the final $ pre*
ceding either of these terminations being made long.
4. remains unchanged, but the final f preceding that
, termination is mode long.
5. as the 3rd case. r
6. as the 4th case.
7. q remains unchanged, but the final f preceding that ter*
mi nation is made long.
8. as the 1st case.
c'ssjS, ralti, Night , declined.
Sing. Plur.
1. ratti, ' ratti,
tfcwtecflo, rattiyo.
* The characteristic letter psed U> denote this declension is o.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
I
Till GRAMMA*.
Sing.
S. doaS*, rattiaf,
3. dt&ScOd, rattiyfi*
4. d*5X§ oo, rattiyi,
5. cr«fc*o 3 ?, rattiyd,
6. as the 4th case.
7. doxSac*, rattiyaw,
<r*5X3 ‘3, rattiya,
8. crt3)S> ratti,
Plur.
dtxmS, rattibhi,
dcx305, rattii)i.
rattinair.
dt5X&#> rattibhi
rattfyi.
as the 4th case.
crooJw,rattisu.
rattf
d*3X5)#c3\ rattf yo.
«P
According - to this example are declined, besides numerous
others, the following nouns feminine in $ ;
patti, infantry, 2 ?e§, tu|)J>hi, joy. ©9, buddhi,
Wisdom. yutti, propriety. wog, p&li, a tine . §9, vud-
dhi, iwcrecse. £$5)§)j vutti, explication. «>3§, nali, a measure •
l>odhi,^fctt$ rdigiosa. kitti, reputation. taS),
sati, memory. tgSybhumi, Me eorM multi, redemption.
«)<S, gati, nature. CSiet, j&ti, fcir/A. eStjjS, titti, fulness,
8®, dhiti, courage. 2S, piti,yoy. ©<5iS, kfaatti, forgiveness*
dt©, ruci, desire. C3 <£, suti, hearing. *»<s;>ca, kanti, splendour .
cjQoJ, yuvati, a yoang female . erwZ*, nandi, /oy. tScjaoJ,
santi, peace- dtt®, rasmi, a ray of light. t3er<9, s&ndlii, a joint.
■C0€53S, tanti, a /w?y?. 0C3«j, vasani, o garment. ®*»0©, ko|)i>
termination . £3©, siddHi, a* occurrence. aggulr, finger •
£&> vuJ)J)hi, »o/nr. esoeiS* sk\\\)Jap<slry. suddlii, purity.
ec&,ya\dp\\\i a beam (o\ yards long ) qCf), diJ>J>hr, sig/d, <$>0,
fddhi, power to fly. AFi, a rivolet. keli, a game.
^f ©©5 aj>avi, a grral wilderness. mati, wisdom. «*C3«n,
asani, thunder. &S t siri, glory. t)S 9 cuti, drerM. ©^9*
osadhi, a star, do?, rati, adherence. £)(*•, dhuli, dw$/.
donij a i&r, a froaf. dQ, cliavi* iw?er CorA. £<©£&,
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
4ft *AM
dundubhi, a drum. pa^ili, a sort of tree. OS, £uti\
prutre.
End of the eighth declension.
KlNtH OECLENSIOW.
Nouns feminine in <3*.*
Singular.
Case 1. S is suppressed.
The other technical terminations of this declension, undergo
the same changes an those of the preceding declension.
«>?, nadi, A river , declined.
Sing. • Plur.
1. nadi ^ nadf nadiyo,
2. nadiM.
3 . e*D<jcflO, nadi) a. eD?t5D, nadibhi,
e*D<**r, nadil}i.
4. er>?o50, nadiy£. «>?«$>, nadinaM,
5. as the 3rd case. as f ^ e 3rd ca8 ^*
G. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7. nadiyaM* *^£*2* nadisu.
esojjfceo, nadi)a.
8. as the 1st case. as the 1st case.
According to the above example are declined the following-
nouns feminine in <Sr besides many others ;
Nouns bearing the affix (3 s , as C3S, sak hi, a female friend;
ijattbi, when it signifies, a female Elephant ; ofSttso*
bhoti, the charitable one , the masculine correlative
term being changed into bhota, and the affix dr . added ;
®0«dO, lira navi, from ©0^>^£0, manavo; «>:S«S, naviki
from «ooSo*>v9; venateyyi, from ®>©eD<s>«)oe^
venateyyo.
wcft<?magari; a city. tgw<S, sukari, a sow. c a*&©, yakkhi, a
female devil . ©6?, maiji, the earth , &>fl, l)aMsi, a goose . eftS%
aj i y a she goat, ®©ox5*^, vetaraNi, the name of a i ivtr. x eaajewsj © %
• O ii also the characteristic letter for this declension.
Digitized by LjOOQie
?AU GRAMMAR.
no
kukku^i, a hen • ©3^$, vaaai i, a female monkey. © 08 , w&pi,
a lake. eocJutfn, taruNi, a girl , C3*i*, sii J, a lioness.
<62», braljmaM, a woman of the Brahmin cast. »0«S,
kaki, a female crow . kadali, a plantain, ttffi,
sakhi, a female friend . gotami, a female of the
Goutama family, €30, ghaju, a woman carrying a water pot.
cxScDtS, gandhabhi, a female drummer. . guna-
ranti, a virtuous woman. *£•)?(?, kum£ri,,« princess : nd-
gi, a female snake , cDS©od, dhitim&ti, or cDcoQcftd), dhitiman-
tf, a courageous woman. ®&5, mlgi, a female. ieir. devi,
f a goddess. mal)ati, or inaljanti, honorable
woman. - tooe$t£3)0, bhayadassavi, from bjbaya*
. dassivini, a timid woman . ca!5DO«>0«*3, gatjapatani, a governess ,
from caGWo, gat)apati, with the addition of the affix fe^
tgtf*»O0 x bhuttdvi, from tgtS3Q!0.9^ 9 bbuttavijii, a female who
has finished her meal. s?, bbikkhunf, a priestess , from
t&*53a) bhikku, with the affix ® ***• QS€)©d5 p dbarooiacdri, from
O0 ©Qo<S^j, dha^nmacariiu, a righteous woman. cftfSpi, rfijinf*
a flfireit, from o'od', raja, <3>£Q.S medhav ini, from #>@030,
medhavi, a wise woman. ewcoS®?, tapassini, from eoocsS,
t&passi, a female ascetic.
End of the ninth declension.
TEN TH DECLENSION. '
Nouns feminine in Q.*
The changes in' the technical terminations are not noticed in
this declension j-r-perhaps because they are similar to those in
the two preceding declensions.
cflOcgj y&gu, A sacrifice , declined.
* Sing, Plur.
1. J^gu. ce*g, ydgu, oooegoedo, y&guyo.
2 . oooeg., y£guM.
* The characteristic letter denoting this declension is q #
F
Digitized by LjOOQie
42
PALI GRAMM'A*.
Sing.
Plur.
& cflOjgoOO, y&guyi.
cape gfS, y&gubhr,
ca:^Sj yagut>i.
4. c33^rx5:, y4gu> 4,
cco^w*, ydgunax,
& cOOcgtfO, yatguy6.
yagubhi,
ccocg^B, yaguyi*
6. os the 4th case.
as the 4th case.
7. cOjegoflsyiguya*,
©so «g S3, y&gusu.
«*»<g*9, yaguyd,
8. as the 1st case.
as the 1st case.
According to the foregoing example are declined most nouns
feminine in but in
declining ®o*£, andfiSeg, the
technical terminations i
undergo the same changes, as in the
declension of 02g, (vide p. 31-32.33.) except the 3, 4, 5, 6*
Singular, which are like
oflOcg.
®0«£, ra&tu, A mother \ declined.
Sing.
* Plur.
1. ©oer,
©ocftwft, m&taro.
2. goo>0*, m&tar&M,
©0«>e>tf, m&tare, t
®Ott)^^?y ra&taro.
3. ®0*£o30 ? matuy*.
®oe»0^6«§y mfitarobhi,
®0CD®5<&, m£tarel)i.
4. ©ocgofl?, mituy^
®3e»cr:en* r m&ttiranaif.
©DCOOeo., mdtknaM,
®0*g«30o, matunax* g
5- ©0*goM r m&tuy&,
as the 3rd case.
<5. as the 4th case,
as the 4th case.
7. @0«><J, uiatati,
mataresu.
©0££t3, niatusu.
8. ®0«5, mdta*.
as the 1st case*
©0«>?, mata.
End of the tenth declension.
i
Digitized by CjOO^Ic
PA&l fiBiKHAl.
43
»
ELEVENTH OECLENSIOX.
' . Nouns feminine in .
The changes in the technical lermiuations are ommitted in
this declension for the reason before specified.
tfS), jambu, The rose apple , declined.
Sing. Piur.
1. tffgj, jambu, v jambu, tf'Cgsott, jambuyo.
8. tfS).*, jambuM,
3. d^ccO, jambuya, jambubhi,
, d"®^, jambui)i.
4. dffbao, jambuya* jambuuaM.
5. as the 3rd case, the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case, as the 4th cose.
7. d*flJktf-, jambuyaM # d'vSjtxj, jambfisu,
tfSjoflo, jauibuya,
8. as the 1st case, as the 1st case,
According to this example are declined all noons feminine
in
End of the eleventh declension ; completing the declensions
of nouns feminine.
TWELFTH DECLEN8IODT.
Nouns neuter in <f.
In this declension the technical terminations undergo the
following changes
1 Singular
1. & is changed into ef.
Plural
1. ^cco is changed into & the final q preceding that terrou
nation being made long; or the substituted termination^ may
be changed into qo.
The technical changes in all the other case6, are the same as
those in .the cases of nouns masculine in 0, (vide page 18.)
with the exceptiou of the 2nd and 8th case*-
44 4
PALI GRAMMAR.
Singular.
2. tf remains unchanged.
8* as nouns masculine in ©.•
Plural#
<$>c?9 is changed into and that £*> into or the & may
be retained and the cp preceding th^t termination made long.
8. &cco is changed into the preceding that termination
being made long.
cittaw,
The mind 3 declined.
Sing.
Plur.
• 1. ©*5XS)*, citta to,
©<3X3tt, citta,
# /
©<5X5D 2 ^, cittani.
2. ©*5X3%, cittaw,
©^SJXy, citte,
©*5X5j0etf>, cittani.
3. ©^OXS**^ cittena,
©*<5X£tS, cittebhi,
4. ©*5WUo5, cittaya,
©*<5X5*6;, cittehi.
©3X5m5D., citt&naM.
©£5X3:tX3, cittassa.
b. ©oxft), chitta,
as the 3rd case.
©SO €*©;), cittani ])&,
©'5j©,e3$>vcitta8n)6.
,
6. ©tsoeca, cittassa.
as th 4th case.
7. ©'5^3305, citte,
0*«xxq, cittesu*
©rac ©C5?, cittamhi,
©3X5C&©*, cittasmiM.
8. ©tsos, citta,
©5X50<b?, cittani.
©tWSO, citta.
According to the above example are declined the following
nouns neuter in cp*, besides numerous others.
punnaM* merit. £££&)•, dukkha m, pain, sorrow. ©g59
«V‘,locanaM , the eye &<?>, phalnts, fruit. C50C3*, pdpaji, sin. §
6*’ mu * aM > root ‘ rhpaM, an image. «ood4>*., karasaM,
a cause , a reason . «^<V, kulan, bank. raoQw, sidhanasj, an oc-
currence, «,«>, ddr.aM, fl giyjf. balaM, rfr«*g<A. .wwb., 80-
taM, the ear. stiaM, the commandments ofBuddho. ja-
laM, a net, gl»dna*», the nose . Ow*, dhauaM, ricA«. &to
Digitized by LjOOQ le
PAM GRAMMAR. '
4 *
mafia*!, a feast. «£©•, sukhaM, health, reel! being.
jhauaM, abstraction. ««<§«. *, nalinaM, a water flower.
pnlinaM, sand. SXtf., tagarax, frankincense , ©WOCJOW*, so-
pdimM, a ladder. aSeespa^, hirannaw, unrefined gold.
tinm, a bank, a bolder. bliavanaM, a place.
chiddaM, a hole. loljaM, a kind of copper.
paw n aw, a leaf <§C0*, liggaM, the sex.
SaM, the mouth . ©w, vanaM, a grove . €)S>, mukhaM,
£?£)•, pi|>haM, # cAa/r. hadayaM, the heart. mara-
naw,' death- ‘ aggaM, member. ©<SS», vatthaM, c/o/A.
t5*C* •, jalaM, water. qft<50©**:., drammanaw, or<Ar, regularity,'
f indriyaM, owe o/* the senses. •, ambuja w , ci flower.
taNaiw, a jn/oce o/* rest. vadanuM, the face ,
dliannaM, grain. nagaraw, o c?7y.
udanaw, o pleasant word. C5^., padaw, x* rse. t575X3>, chattaM, 2 /m«
Iretla;, p&naM, jwicc. padumaw, the lotos.
udakaM, water. tg©eft%bbu vanaM, dwelling. BC3y«D*, susdnaM,
burying ground. dldtaM, a firebrand. qpO£g>, dyn-
dhim, an implement, *©•, aNdaM, scerf. 08<r«, civaraM, a priest's
robe. zsxf^>* 9 karaNaM, z^orA. «§(••, kulaw./a/wiTy.
nnanaM, knowledge «*Dcc5e*>, nayanaM, the eye. y6&s$ss5%* 9
arannaM 9 forest. aso^D., ydnaM, « /r;r riding , or reclining on.
But in declining manaM, /A<? iwiwrf, and some other
noun 8 of thi$ declension t|ie technical terminations undergo
the following changes.
Singular*
1. B is changed into cp..
2. «p? remains unchanged.
3. eoo is changed into qp, and the augment vs Introduced be*
tween the final qp and that termination ; or may be changed
into 3
4. w is changed into © and the augment es Introduced be*
tween the final <p and that termination ; or wmay be doubled,
5. C3®) or optionally ®t5Dj may either remain unchanged, or
be converted into aer;t and that changed into ep and the aug*
ment introduced between the final cp and that ternii nation,
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
46
PALI XIBAMHA^.
6 . as the 4th ca se-
7. or optionally S&5 may either remain unchanged, or he
converted into or into y, (he augment w being introduced
between the final q and the latter termination.
8 . 6 ip suppressed and the final q sometimes converted into
qp and sometimes remains unchanged. •
Plural.
1 . <rc 3 ? is changed into ^5, the final q preceding that ter*
minatiou being made long ; or the substituted termination may
be changed into ep.
2. exo is changed into ^5, and that *45 into or the *45 may
be # retatned and the q preceding that termination made long*
3. tS or optionally o 6 remains unchanged, but the q pre-
ceding those terminations is changed into
4. remains unchanged) but the final q preceding that
termination is made long.
5. us the 3rd case,
6 - as the 4th case.
• 7- g remains unchanged; but the final q preceding that ter-
mination is changed into
8 * ®c :9 is changed into & and the final q preceding that
termination made long.
©w., manaM, The mind , declined.
Sing.
plur.
1. ©w», manaM,
©wo, mana,
2* ©w.*, manaM,
©wo**, mandni.
©^w, mane.
3 . ©WC30, munasa,
©wo^?, man£ni.
®©wtr, manehhi)
®«>w*w, mjanena.
©3>W£B, raanelji.
4 . ©W manaso,
. ©wow., mandnaM.
©WE£3, manassa.
-
jh ©WC3D, nmnasa,
as the 3rd case.
®W©££ 0 , manam^a, ,
. ©WC 2 £) 0 , manasma,
6 . as the 4th case.
a 9 the 4th esse.
7 , ®w<3, m a nasi,
©3>wt3, mane$u.
mafie,
-
Digitized by LjOOQle
PALJ GRAMMAR, 47
Sing. Plur.
©«*>©&>, manarol}i,
Seo€3$*, manasmiM* '
8. ©€T), inana, ©***)«?, mauam.
©w, man&.
According to this example are declined the following noum
neuter in ef.
siraM, lAe head • @00*, vayaM, age. e0®., cef&M,
the heart. £<5., uraM, lAe breast. Ocfl., payaM, i»«7A. C»@«,
tamaM, dar/c. • corf., tejaM, splendour. yasaM, /ime.
C3c7., saran, remembrance . rajaM, dust. too., tapaM f
crrce/imwj, ©oee«, v6yain, the wind. Q&* 9 dhajaM, a Jlag .
©0% vacaM, a word . qpa?., ayaM, iron.
In the declension of participial and other attributi\ r es form-
ed by the affixes, © or © and <530$>i — the following changes
are made in the technical terminations.
Singular.
1. 8; and crag, are both suppressed and changed into cf,
2. 3. 4. 5 6. 7. S. These terminations undergo the same
* changes, as those of the corresponding cases, (vid. pages 22.23.)
Plural.
1. gczo is changed into and the final £ of erxsj is changed
into cp which letter is made long before the termination.
2. as the 1st case.
3. 4. 3. t). 7. a* the changes in nouns masculine in eftoa. (vid.
- page* 22. *3 )
n 8. as the 1st case.
gUNavaM, Virtue > declined.
Sing. Plur.
1. cg^£.,guNavaM, guwavantani.
giiNavantaM,
3. ' guNavata, eg4J«£5<S>eJttsaD, gUNavantebhi,
cg<^©acra&eft,guNavantene.c§4£0$€no)&D, guNavantelji.
4. cg^Q^eD?, guNavanto, cg4^0«)., guNavataM, -
<B^QcJ 3 Oit 3 C 09 gUNavantassa.cg^Sc 5 X»o<^)*, guNavant&nau,
Digitized by LjOOQle
48 -
FAU ORAMMAR.
Sing. Plur.
5. <g <*8odi, guNavata, as the 3rd case. 1
guNavan-
taM^a, eg^C/<5» t3£>), gUNa-
vania?mi.
4>. as the 4th case. as the 4 th case.
7. cg^SS, guNavati, cg^S se^8»«B.ej, gutfawuitwo.
€?© jrtCD, giiNavante,
cg4jw0c5^c>.®^. guNavantam-
l)i,cg^Qoxxt3®*, guNavan-
tasmisc-
$. guNavaM, cg^Q, as the 1st case.
guNava, eg *££)?, giiNav&.
e „ '
According to this example are declined c£©fcf., gacchaw, go-
ing , and other participial nouns neuter in <?•.
End of the twelfth declension.
THIRTEENTH DECLENSION.
Nouns muter in § .*
In this declension the technical terminations undergo the
following changes.
Singular.
1. a is suppressed.
2. cp* is changed into ..
The terminations of the 3rd 4th 5th 6th and 7th cases (Sing,
and Plur,) undergo the same changes as in the declension of
nouns masculine in <§.
8. as the 1st case*
Plural.
1. is either changed into or suppressed ; — the final
$ being in both cases made long.
8. as the 1st case
* The characteristic letter to denote this declension istgjg) .
Digitized by LjOOQ le
TA U 0 RAIMA ft. 4ft-
tpeS, aj>£hi, bone, declined.
Sing. . f - Plur.
1. flftd, a{)J)hi. , &pf>hini, «pe©, ajtphi
2. ffeb', aJ>j>hiM»
3. *f Start, a|>J)hin£. tfC&$ 5, aJ)f>Mbhi, '
4. a^hind, <*<&»., a^hinaM.
qeSatt, aj>|)hhi88a.
6. aj)|)hin6, as the 3rd case.
^e?©C£r, aJ)J)himl}d,
qefteaSto, aj)f>hism&.
6. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7. af^himl)!, *09^, affhisu. -
apfliismiM.
8. as the 1st case. as the 1st case.
End of the thirteenth declension.
FOURTEENTH DECLENSION.
Nouns ncutrr in & *.
81. Tn this declension the technical terminations undergo the
following changes.
" Singular. /
1. Q is suppressed.
2. cf. is changed into * and the final & preceding that termi-
nation made short.
Plural.
1. is either changed into «£5 or suppressed.
2 as the 1st case.
The terminations of the 3rd 4th 5th 6th and 7th cases (sing,
and plur.) undergo the same changes, as those in the declension
of nouns masculine in f, (sing, and plur.) and the 8th case is
the same as the 1st.
<J©, daNSi, declined.
Sing. Plur.
1. ^©> daisSi, <©*?» dftN$fnt,
<i©> daNgi.
% d&N&M.
* S5§) is alio the characteristic letter fur this declensien.
a
1 ' * Digitized by Google •
*
Titl ttXMMAk.
Sing. ' t*lar.
3 $©«?, dawSinS. $©«:, daNftfbh^
tt© 6 ?, danSibi.
4. ^ 8 »MW, dasSino, ^©«r„», daNSlnaft.
*^© JC3, daNSissa.
5 ^©»30, (lasSiiVS, as the 3rd easel,
<;©€*©', dafeSiu^fi,
<t©C©>, daNdisma.
6 * as the 4th case. tts the 4th case.
7. <;©®bo, daNSimlji, ^©w, datoSfsu.
^©53®»; daNShmiv.
8 . as the 1 st case. fcs the 1 st case.
End of the fourteenth declension.
FIFTEENTH DECLENSION.
Noufis neuter in C,-*
8 ?. Tn this declension the technical terminations undergo tbr -
same changes as those in the d*eeteirstoii of frotaus neuter in 9
Agt, declined.
Sing. - Plur.
I. epoaj, iyu- fiyfiini, *acs, 6 yu.
2 ayuM.
3. qigtno, iyuni. «p9 ce'&, iyuhhi,
«(t0«y5, ajuhi.
4. cpjeoaerto, dytfno, '^c^yiy'unafcv
cpjestitt, fyussa.
5. ^ 3 aJ«r, fiyuni, as the 3rd case.
epoeS^tSW, fiyuml)3,
«J 0 f.CJ® , fiyusmi.
6 . as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7. <p3ce®fc0, ayuml ii, cfooeo, &yusu.
c po-asts©., ^vusrmif.
8 as the 1 st case. as the 1 st case.
End of the fifteenth declension, and of the declensions efita
ter nouns. ,
* Th« characteristic Utter of this dcciemiou w g.
Digitized by
PAW |I
The following ppuns grp optionally ittWftpUpf wfqnuuine,
according to their respective terminations.
Mwctdivc. Feminine.
•55>Oo, gg{#>, water pot. «*§, ghapi,
q3<Sy a^pUi, a measuring tod q?e5> yaf^bi,
7i cubit* lo»g.
Bipeds.
kbattiyo, a Icing. kbgttiyg
«3©s>gRp, Siunanej a priest. satjmuL,
Quadrupeds.
«cae<»'gajo, an elephant. qg£S>, ggja,
©ajsnseao, vyaggho, a tiger . . S*cra£, vyagghf,
The following nouns are optionally masculine or neuter*
Nouns ending in
83. 03©r. dh!»»»Ptf , p> nighteoitvtosi. the
world. kammaM, o, work. tgttem, bhuAgpajfi, art
^darning. ©'A3®, brabw»» n Brahmin- sa-yaqa, o, bed .
#*$5}©, kiwuitm, a flower. 'frtft'iOQ*, akasau, o, the shy, the utmost
f^epe, q|*U»©',pa#ggfpgM, 9 split -ctiqu. tftKi, vasa«.«,rt (hcttiing
place. •$&$•» Vfare (he prit tl resides and iu.‘
struct* fas pupil*. <?«»> rwn, 0 , tflsfe- «#<*♦, sgrit - #*, <A body.
ea©?, pnlgM, Q, fruit- rPPIWP, 0 , colour, pa.
dpipaftf, o,jf 4 »rr. fj.igojj'*, vi^ataM,©, a Buddhist temple. qa
psana#, «, a sept. e§^. ( suvaNcia*, o> gpld. aD^
*S3*, odanaM, o, rice, aatoscew, kut)apw»Jl, q, a hSinghatesn
toin, 9{ pice. £t?Sot?.,. up^n ^sm, o, abstinence. K)S**)s*
bhavanaM, o, abode. tJfc.CUf, divasan, a, day. w^^wa*. yob?
banaM, 0, beauty, $©', thuja*, o+okeap. cfgbr, rap^isaM,
country.
Nouns ending in £* ■'
81. q®, ambu, . water. »£}, madhu, honey.
The following nouns are optionally feminine or neuter*
(in tf) «acstf», nagaraM, i, a city, (in y) «p0S, acci, flame.
Digitized by google
52
PALI GRAHMAfe.
The following nouns are optionally of all three genders.
Nouns iu
•&©•, tapaif, o, i. brinks border . coo:*, pattaM, a leaf, also
a vessel. pupa, a couple . 6©C% maNSalaM, o, i, a
circle. puraar, o, i, a city* kalasaM, a water pot.
For instance, the nominative of en&* may be either
mas. tapo, «&0, tapl, fern, or «d£>, tapaM, ncut>— and others in
the same manner; also proper names; as, mas -
^©^0030, devadattd, ftm- *>$6^5XV, devadattaM, neut.
CHAPTER IV.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ATTRIBUTIVES^
85. The pronopns and pronominaU are comprised in the &1-
lowingjist.
tS#©), sab bo, all . kataro, which ? (of two.)
katanio, which ? (ofmanr/.) £&><£0, ubha\a, both.
itaro, other, either. y+95%essp, afrno, other , different .
arlnataro, o f her, either , different .
annatamo, certain, «<*©), pubbo, /onwfr,prt7>r, East . pa-
ro, after, (in time or space,) other, subsequent. apfcro,
behind, after, another. dakkhiNO, right, dexter ,
South. £,* 3 * 5 -®<r?, uttarp, i/ppcr, iVor^. eko, owe,
• 0 * 0 *, yo, relative.
eto,
t®% iaitN, Mi*.
<f©, Bmii, this, or that indefinitely
«•, kin, what .» ("Interrogative.JI
tunica, Ihotf. ~i
9©S0, aml)a, /. j Personals,
«,* ta, that.
• 50 follow* cfl in the Pali Grammar,
^ ' 'Digitized by Google
► Demonstratives.
PALI. GRAMMAR.
58
86. The changes in the technical terminations of the pronoun
t3<s>©3, sabbo, are similar, except in a few instances, to those in
the declension of nouns masculine in 8, the differences only will
be noticed here ; —
Plural.
1. Wees is changed into
i is changed jplo or the fin^} cf preceding that
termination being changed into
6. as the 4th rase.
8, as the 1st case,
Masculine.
t£JP©D, sabbo, Jll, declined.
Sing# Plur.
1. sabbo, pjs£), sabbe.
2. t:©*, sabbaM.
3. ttwSeo, sabbeqa. esS'?, sabbebhi,
/ - , L3*©iv, sabbebhi.
4. t3©£X3> sabbassa. ta?©3? t sabbe-a,
subbe*anaif f
5- tt©3, sabba, C3©®^)3, sab- as the 3rd case.
bamM.
££©£&'» sabbasma.
6. as the 4th case. ap flie 4(Il caPG .
7. tc©€£^, sabbamlji, t5®©*^, sabbesu.
to©C3©*, sabbasiniM. J
8* CC©, sabba, t^©D, sabb&. t?®©, snbhe,
87. In the feminine gender £3<£©2 is declined with the termi?
nations of nouns feminine in except in the undermentioned
cases ;
Singular.
4. « is changed into ew, which becomes c*M by the addition
of another es, and the final qo preceding the ter -urination, is
. made short ; or the technical termination tupy be changed intq
fCpca, the final q® being in ljke manner suppressed. %
6. as the 4th case. w
7* C3® # , is changed into «% which becomes t£3? 0 hy the a4?
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
?ALi 4HUMHAK.
m
4*41011 of m augment m, the final ep preceding that terminal*?!)
being made short, or wf# is changed into csf.
Plural. '
4. en* is changed into e^», or teo^n*.
6. as the 4th case.
7. as the 7th case of nouns feminine in <p.
Feminine >
88. t£©D, sabba, declined*
Sing- Plur.
I. t3©\ sabba* tc©), sabba, tr©>ocd?, sabb&yo.
' 4. t3©*, sabbaM,
3. t3©Da«, sabbi^a. t3©3t£, fabbabbi,
tC©J&5, sablPil}!.
4. W©~£30, sabbassa, tc©DW, sabbasaM,
tO©*0, sabbaya. ts©JO0«50*, sabbasanaa*.
5. as the 3rd case. as the 3rd case;
fi. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7- C3©££3*, sabbassaM, t:©:>B}* sabbasu,
te©3cfl*, sabbayaM.
8. t3o©, sabbe. as the 1st case.
In the neuter gender C5o©o Js declined with the termination*
used in declining the same pronoun in. the masculine gender,
with the exception of the termination^ of the 1st and 2nd case*
Singular and Plural, and the 8th case, Singular and Piufdr
, Neuter . '
89. t3©-, sabbaM, declined.
Sing. Plur.
J. to©*, sabbaM, to ©3^, sabbfcni,
g' C$^©, sabbe,
t: ©$**?, sabbini.
C3«>©*53, sabbena, ts.e>©^b sabbebb^
ft 3£>©£j6, sabbe^i.
4. t3©3£?, sabbassa, C3^©::., sabbesftM*
too© aabbeiftgiM#
Digitized by LjOOQ le
TAM 6 HAMM AH.
85
Siflg. Plur.
5. t&©>, sabbS, as (be Sfd case.
t5©®G£y, sabbam^A,
tO©ttS)o, sabbasmA.
6. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7. t:© sabbamljt. €3*©^, sabbeeru.
C3©£3S)!., sabbasmiM,
8* ta©, sabba, C3 ©d, sabbA, tS©)e5?, sabbAni.
Liketa*©:), sabbo, are dediaed Q^©3, pubbtye^tf?, p*r<£
cptt<8fdo, aparo ; so also (leaving oat the vocative) are declined
•cco, jo, and cSeort, eko, o0D, yk> and ©wo, eka, cfi» and
jaM and ekaM.
90. In declining <g in the masculine gender, the following:
changes ave made in the technical terminations.
Singular.
1. & is changed into £ and the to into €3.
Plural.
1. cc*> is changed iato t9 and zn maj optionally be changed
into
2- The changes in the rest of the technical terminations,
(with the exception of the vocative which is wanting! are
in all the 3 genders similar to the changes which take place m
thd declension of €3$©o, with this addition, that the may btr
optionally converted into «> in every case but the 4th, 6th, and
7th feiu. (sing, plur.) and that, in the feminine gender, besides the
regular change? before not reed, the following further changes
occur in the 4th 6th and 7th cases singular.
4 6. . tt is changed into txoo or cokOog, and the final pre-
ceding those terminations is changed into f ,
7. w changed into G2C3*, and the #nal $o preceding that
termination changed into f .
cs>, ta> That, declined-
Masculine .
Sing.. Plur.
1 . so. fw, we, <•«, te.
48. ws, tfr., tear.
8. nena, tena. tfWtS, nehhi, ♦eotB, tebhi,
f>W<S,nel)i, tel)i.
Digitized by
Google
m
PJU*1 GRAMMAR-
Sing. Plur.
4* nassa, .«)^eo,tas6a. €>«joC 3., nesaM, <s>«eao«*K, ne-
s£naM, jM»C3*, tesaM, §»CB6ft
e*>, tes&naM.
5 . w. ©C5DO, namM, e»®&n tain- as the 3rd case.
la y «Joe©o, nasina, coejS)o,
tasni£.
6. as the 4th case, as the 4th case.
7. e*>®&5, naml)i, e»®cS* taml)i, nesu, #«C3, tesiL
.«*C3©% nasmiM, cats©.,
lasniiM.
91. Feminine .
Sing. Plur.
1. too, sa. «do, na, WDooflO, n&yo,
e»o, t£, cddooOO, t4yo.
2. «*>, naM, «♦, tan.
3. wdjO, naya, c»oco, t&ya. *&:&> nabhi, tibhi,
nal)i, cbo&S, tal)i.
4. tnzxtf*, tissdya* etemtissa, *&ot3*,t* saM > cacresotso*, tisanae#*
*BS£00*Oc3, tassat&ya. *
5. as the 3rd case. as the 3rd case,
6. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7. tiss&M, t»C2C5«, tassaM.coo^j tasu.
92. Neuter .
Sing. Plur.
1. zr* naM, to*, taw. e$3Dw, n£iii, eooeB, t&ni,
2. naM, cs>*, taM. e>w, ne,
e>t», te, tani.
The rest like the masculine.
eto, this is declined in all three genders like *d the
to, of c5»«>o, eto, being changed into C3 Nom. Sing. C5®COO,
eso, fen». c^to^ esa neut. CSo, etaM.
93. In declining §©•, imaM,/At>, in the masculine gender, the
following changes are made in the technical terminations.
Digitized by LjOck
9AL1 GHA* MAM. ST
Singular.
1 . <3 is suppressed, ,and 9 ©* changed into^,
5. 9 * undergoes no change.
3 . ^0 either remains unchanged, or is changed into t$eo ; in
the former case, the f$ preceding' that termination is changed
into qpen, in the latter intof©.
4. w is doubled^ and may either be preceded by f ® or by
its substitute 9 .
5. C5®3 remains unchanged, and may either be preceded by fg)
or by its substitute 9 ; or ®C£> 3 , may be substituted for c5®3, and
preceded by f® only*
6 . as the 4th case.
7. C3©* remains unchanged, and may either be preceded by
9 $ or by its substitute^; or &§> may be used for ttS* and pro*
ceded by 9 ® only. ,
Plural.
1. ©cso is changed into t9«
2 . ec3D is changed into td.
3. tS3 or optionally tS remains unchanged, and may either be
preceded by or by it& substitute e ; if by 9 © . the final 9 of
that word must be changed into ts.
4. eo* is. changed into eo. or too«* and preceded either tgr
ye© or by the substitute
5. as the 3rd case.
6 . as the 4th case.
7. q remains unchanged, and mny either be preceded by 9 ©,
or by its substitute 1 9 ; if by f ©, the final 9 must be changed
into g,
94. In declining 9 ®, ima, in the feminine gender, the techni-
cal terminations undergo the same el ranges as in (he declension
of except that the nominative termination is converted into
cpoflMmd that the following further changes occur in the 4th 6 th
and 7th cases Singular.
Singular.
4. 6 . to is changed into cacao or tattoos, and the into 9 .
7. C3©* is changed into eatt* and y© into 9 .
In ; declining 9 ®) in the neuter gender, the technical termi-
nations undergo the same changes as in the masculine ; except
.that the technical terminations of. the 1st and, 2nd Singular, — 9
M
Digitized by UooQle
SB
PALI GTtAMHAB.
being suppressed, f or §£• is substituted in its stead ; and
tliat «cso, the teclinical termination of the 1st and 2nd cases plu-
ral, is chnAged into or and the final preceding the last
termination made long.
f®. ima, ThtSy declined*
Masculine .
Sing. Plur.
1. qa:*, ayaur, §*®, hne. * *
2. t®*, imaM,
3. aneno, §©W0, ebhi, imebhi,
iminS. <5cT, et>i, imel)i. ,
4. assa, §®CX!, imasia. C$ts., esaM, es&nav,
iniesaM, f»®C30W->
imesanaiu.
5. qe£)0, asm*, f fe®bDD, imam- as the 3rd case.
l}a y §>%t5S)0, irnaNii)^
6* as the 4th case- as'the 4th case.
7. <?tr©v asmiM, §£®<?, C5^, esu, f imesu,
imamli, f©C3® # , im asmiM.
' Feminine .
I. qpof», aya»n f®0 5 im£, $®C®aa9, fmayo.
9. $®*, imaM.
3- ^®oa«, imaya. %®otS, imablii, f ®0*5?, imalji.
4. qtaaotf,assa>a, qpeett, assa, §©3«v iin4saM y
9©t2£30a% imissava, ffeX30, imasanaM.
imissa, f*)v^ y iniaya.
5. as the 3rd case. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case. as th 4th case.
7. assaM, $©!3»v inais- f®^, ima$q..
sam. «®dcc # , imavaM.
Neuter .
1. f $•, idaM, f imam, t«®> imej im&ni.
The rest like the masculine;
95. I« declining «*§), amu, this, in the masculine gender, the
technical terminations undergo the following changes.
Digitized by* Google
?ALI GRAMMAR*
Singular.
1. 8 is either suppressed, and the © of q>§) changed into «?,
or 8 is changed into &), and the augment -aa Introduced between
that termination and the final £ of qpg.
2. is clianged into *
Plural.
1. ©c35 is either suppressed and the final £ made long, or it
remains unchanged.
2. as the 1st case.
' The rest of the terminations undergo the same changes as in
the declension of nouns masculine in £ (page 30) except the ter-
mination >50*, of the 4th and 6th cases plural, which is changed
into or and the £ preceding these terminations made
long.
,96. In declining cp©, in the feminine gender, the technical
terminations undergo the same changes as in the declension of
nouns fem. in £, (page. 41*) with the following exceptions*
Singular*
1. 8 is suppressed and the & of^g changed iuto w,
4* 6. cs is changed either into or ao.
7. C3©' is changed either into tX3 # or cj°.
Plural..
4. 6. is changed either into e?., or pozn*.
In declining in the neuter gender, the technical termina-
tions undergo the same changes as in the masculine ; except
that the terminations of the 1st and 2nd cases Sing, are changed
into <*£•; and that either remains unchanged, or is changed
into the final £ preceding the latter termination being
made long.
cj§>, amu, This, fin Sanskrit this or that.) declined.
Masculine:
Sing. Plur,
1. asu, arnuko. 9©, amu, amuyo*
2. amuM, •
3. qp©«r>0, amuna. amubhi, amfi^i.
aumno, <f©C3*, ainunaM,
9©CX3> amussa. amusunaM.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
' F'ALf OWAMdARi
Sing.
5. amurol>6,
SO, arnusmi.
6. as the 4th case.
7. «f£)®?B,amuml)i,
vfSW©*, amusmiit.
Plur.
as the 3rd case;
as the 4th esse.
^Sjts, amusu.
Feminine.
Sag.
1. efW, asu.
2. q®', arouM,
3. <f® jC 9, amuyft.
4. ^C3C», amussd, <f§oM,
amuyi.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
7. 9§C££3*, amussaM, tffsjoa*,
amuyaM, amuyi.
Plur.
<qp§}, amu, *§s>cfl9, amuyo.
ef®t3, amubhi, ef§S#5, amul)i.
<*§}»•, amusaM, «f©e30e«.,
amusinaH.
as the 3rd case,
as the 4th case.
9§)g, amusu.
Neuter.
Sing. Plur. . <
1. 9fi*> aduw. *§}, amu, 9§}«*3, arouni.
The rest like the masculine.
97. In declining *£• kiu, what ? the technical terminations un-
dergo the same changes as in the declension of C 3 »S) 3 , (page
53,) the *£• being previously changed into as, making in the
Singular ewo, iw. aw,/ «•, n.
98. In declining ag©t 03 , tuml)&, Thou, and q$X£>, ami) a, /,
t he following changes are made in the technical terminations.
Singular.
1. 8 is suppressed, and changed into ©• and jg0«^
andq&s into
2. ty* is suppressed, and < 5 ®w changed into «., «©»,
agS. 5 and into ®. and »©.
3. eoj is suppressed, and ,<g$® changed into S)oM or «s*jO •
and >» into da*.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
F MIA GRAMMA*.
61
4. 09 is suppressed, and tgeto changed into tb0, tgesStea*,
and <f&& into «>c£p*, epeto* ; or w is changed into
* and tp&ia into e)e) making §e)\
5 4 as The 3rd case.
6. as the 4th'case.
7. C3§> is suppressed, and tgeto changed into SD<9 ; and ©3,
and ep@t£) into $<S.
1 Plural.
1. o<jft> is changed. into *9, for *g®&> and <pgG0, or Ibr the
latter is suppressed, and cp®&> changed into eto*.
2. oc3o is changed into t$ or span*.
3. iSor optionally to remains unchanged; and the final tp pro-
ceding that termination is changed into t$»
4* eo. is changed into ep5*»*. .
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case*
7. $] remains unchanged ; but the final qp preceding' that ter-
mination is changed into 6>.
<£$)$>, tuml).a, 7%on, declined*
Sing, Plur*
1. £>», tvaM, e^Q., tuvau. tumlje.
£. tan, tavaw, «a®G£>ow, tumljakaic,
tvftM, turaw. *£«©CiD, turnip.
3. S)a%tvaya, taytu tura^ebhi,
tumljelji.
4* CDS, tava, *£OCQ., tujrtjawr, tum^akaM.
tunn^aMw
A. as the 3rd case. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case. as the 4th case.
7. coed, ta) i. tumljesu.
aml^a, 1, declined.
, J * * 5 ®* a ^ aM - ®cflv mayaM, o^t>®e», amlje.
9. ©V "«■» ®®*, mamaui. *©t»5«a», am^kau,
<P#®C£>, aml}e.
3. ©cM, may*. «f»®e»ac, an^eblii,
amljelji.
4. ©©, mama, ®csi>, mayljan, am^kax.
atnJjaM, ©&», marnax.
Digitized by LjOOQie
62
PAfcl GRAMMAR.
Sing. Plnr.
5. as the 3rd ease. s the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case, as the 4th case.
7. ®<3, mayi. 2©tt) W , amljesu.
S9. in the 2nd, 4th, and 6th, cases plur. «£©&:* tumha, toge-
ther with the technical termination, may be changed into vo,
and aral)a, into no; as 2nd case, tfesaS) rak-
khatuvo, may he preserve you; pa«sat uno, may he
tee us. (4th case) dadaUivo, he gives to you ;
dadat)ino, give to us. (Oihcase,) C3S)}#0„‘saddb&vo f
your faith; satthano, our science.
In the 4th and 6th cases sing. •>«», te, may be substituted for
and its technical termination ; and me, for
and its technical termination; as, ( ith case,) 5 c,©3>«d, dadamite,
- 1 give to thee; 5a®, dad£l)ime, give to me. (6th case.) §$•
«>«), idaMte, this (is f thine. «fc3*r©, ayaMine, this (i*) mine.
In the 3rd. case sing. 4®SD, with its technical termination
may be changed into te, and into me ; as,
€*», kataMte, done by thee ; kataMine, done by me.
In the 3rd. case plur. with its technical termination
may be changed into <£>©0; a °d into as, <aa
, tD*s0O, kataMvo, done by you; «>*sa - s^O, kataMno, done by us •
In the 1st. case plur. the same changes may take place; as,
ga main vogacchey y a i ha , go ye to the vil-
lage; c»o£^wocKi®0^oa»®, gamaMnogaccheyy&ma, we go to
the village .
End of the declension of Pronouns.
DECLENSION OF (C3 •©*, SaMkhya,) NUMERALS.
100. The decieiision of eko, one, has already been no-
ticed; vide page ty-
The numerals, from two
gular.
In declining 0, dwi, two,
the following changes.
to eighteen inclusive, have no Sin-
the technical terminations undergo
Digitized by
Google
FALT GRAMMAR.
63
Plural.
1 . best is suppressed and 8 changed into g$® or £ 0 .
2 . as above.
3. t 8 or optionally & remains unchanged, but the final f
preceding tho*e terminations is made long.
4. remains unchanged, but to the eo of co- another
is added.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
7. eg remains unchanged, but the final 9 preceding that ter-
mination is made long.
8 , dwi, declined, Mas. Fem . and Neut.
1 . £©©, duve, £©* dwe.
2 . as above:
3 . ©t8, dwibhi, ©<&, dwil^i. ,
4. dwinnaM. J
5. as the 3rd case.
6 . as the 4th case.
7. ©C3, dwisu.
In declining &, fi,7W, in the three genders, the techni-
cal terminations undergo the fol lo wing changes.
Masculine .
1. <?c?3 is suppressed and <3 changed into encew
2 . as above.
3. & or optionally remains unchanged but the final * pre-
ceding those terminations is made long.
4. ^.i* changed into •s**' or t h e final &
preceding those terminations being suppressed. W
5. as the 3rd case.
6 . as the 4th case. ^
7. « remains unchanged, but the finaF f preceding that ter-
xnination is made long. • 0
Feminine .
1 . coo is suppressed, ami ^ changed inter tSfSfcEtti
2 . as above.
3. as the masculine.
4. .« 3 * , has another snperadded, and CX3, is introducec
between the numeral and that termination.
h. as the masculine*
Digitized ' LjOOQ ie
PALI GRAMMAR.
M
6 . a* the 4th case.
7. as the masculine.
Neuter.
1 . peso together with the numerals are changed into &-A.
2 . as above.
The rest like the masculine.
3, ti, Three, declined.
Masculine.
1 . neon, tayo.
2 . as the 1 st case.
3 . &», tibhi, &£, tit)i.
4. tinnaM, tinnaNaasf*
5 . as the 3 rd case.
6 . as the 4th case. N
7. ocs, ttsu. - '
Feminine .
1. «®C3esO, tisso.
2. as the first case.
3. 3«S, tibhi, 35, ttt)i.
4. «eac 3 *, tissaM.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case,
7. 3ej, tisu.
Neuter.
1 . w® 3 , tini.
The rest like the masculine.
101, In declining €tea, catu, four, the technical terminations
undergo the following changes.
Masculine .
1 . *033 is changed into®, and the final <5 .preceding that ^ter-
mination into c^i <> r wilh tbe nuiueral > 18 Ranged into
€*SXStOO<So.
2 818 &boV6#
3. iB or optionally «8 .remain* -unchanged, but the final G
preceding that termination is made long.
- Digitized by
Google
*AM ORAMMAIt.
05
4. >en. remains, but has a supperadJed.
5. as the 4th case.
7, g remains unchanged.
Feminine .
■ 1. with the numeral it changed into
2. as above. %
3. as the masculine.
4. has another super added, and C3C5 is introduced be*
tween that termination and the numeral, the final £ of the
latter being previously changed into qp.
5. as the masculine.
G. as the 4th case.
7. g remains unchanged.
' Neuter .
1. with the numeral is changed into©5X3n&
2. as above.
The rest like the masculine.
©;g, catu, j F our, declined*
Masculine .
1. caturo, ©SJODSSxft, catt&ro.
2. as above.
3. ©*g?S, catubhi, ©*gfc5, catut)i.
4. ©3>**>253% catunnaM.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
7* catusu.
s Feminine.
1. Qeaettttt, catasso*
2. as above.
3* ©s^tS, catubhi, ©«^<S, catulji.
4. catussannaM.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case*
7. ©%&, catusu.
x
Digitized by Google
FAt/I eKAIItlAV.
Neater.
1. cattiri.
2. as above* N
Th e rest like the masculine.
102. In declining the techn«ml termination
undergo the following changes.
1. e&o k suppressed. '
2. a* above.
3. t8 or optionally tfc remains unchanged.
4. er>* remains, but has a eo superadded.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
. 7. g remains unchanged.
t:©, panea, Ffoc, declined.
A/e*. Fern. JSfeti*.
1. C5©, panca.
2. as above.
3. e©*n, pane ali, paficabhi.
4. er©»>*F>, pancanna.
5. as the 3rd case.
6. as the 4th case.
7. C5©W, pancasu.
103. Like e©, panes, are declined r£ cha y six, t2*3» r $*rti* r
seven, af J)ha, eight, «j©, nava, »?>ie, ^ce, dasa, teni
ek&dasa, eleven, Q'A er, dw&dasa, twefve, (or ©3<5t3, barasa,^
©eneftt, terasa, thirteen , (or *»(•£?,,> ©qftt, cuddasa, fourteen* ,
(or e>©oqjC3, coddnsa, or ©*£<Jf ts 9 catuddasa.) ttm&cftt, pan-
narasa, or e©^£? y pancadata, fifteen, e>Cs0$C3, solasa, or e>C80 <f
tt, sorasa, sixteen, sattarasa, or ttbxs^ttySatladasa,
seventeen, qeSoc 5S5, a|jf)liarasa, or *€»^C3, a^jMdasa, eighteen:
ekunavisati, Is declined like nouns feminine in
f . vide p. 36, but the declension is confined to the singular
number.
104. ekunavati, Nineteen, declined.
1. tt«^«5D0C3en, ekunavisati.
2. CS*85^W0C3S^ ekunavisatiM-
Digitized by LjOOQ le
F A LV GRAMMAS'
3. ekunavis8tiy&.
4. C9«^e*30wecoeo, ekunavisatiyi.
5. ms the 3rd case.
6* as the 4th case*
7. c5«^«**0C3<a So0», ekunavisatiyaM.
8. c5«^eft0eaS, ekunavlsati.
According to this example, and in the singular number only,
are declined the numerals from twenty to ninety eight inclusive.
From ninty nine to one hundred thousand, inclusive, are decli-
ned like nouns neuter in «f, vide page 43.
105. ekunasata, Ninety nine, declined*
No plural.
■ \
1. 0e^403ttfQ», ekanasatsM*
9. as above.
3. C$caf^e»^S0osMD, ekuoasaten*.
4. ek&nosatassa.
h. 04$i«ft€ocoo, ekunasati, eknnaMUkam^lf
C3^e*DC3 ekunasatasrcd.
6- as the 4th case.
7. ekunasata, (5«^ef3TOOD®c3, ekunagataralji,
C5«^e^CeeoC3®*, ekhnasutasmiM.
8. C5«^www, ekunasata *
fcesrc©, kopi, a hundred lacks , is declined like CJ«^«083$,
ekunavisati*
106. The numeral ©ttS, dwisati, too hundred, is declined with
a plural termination in instances like the following, £0053eS
Woc^ ®©«VXB0, dwevisatiye buddhanth, the teeth of Buddho are
too twcttfiesy viz. forty; $*cx:o953»<s>co& tissovi*
# The 4thand 8th cases appear to differ in a small degree from the
eases of uoims neuter in but this may perhaps be owing to an error
jn the ©<5 «T?c£qc, vaiaucgiUa.
Digitized by LjOOQle
PALI GRAMMAR.
' sntiyo dinaghapiki, the hours of the day art three twenties , Vis.*
sixty and iu other similar instances.
107. In translating from Pali into Singhalese the pronoun
C5i>t30, eso, he, wherever it occurs, is rendered by
metema, c5cso, es£, she , by o©0, mo, C etaM, this, by e>9*
End of'the declension of numerals.
CHAPTER V.
INDECLINABLE WORDS.
108 . Of this class, are words termed ejtScM* aligga, from their
admitting of no distinction of gender; as, the affix ®*B0, to,
which is substituted for thejermination, whether masculine^
feminine 9 or neuter, of the fifth case: — Example. For ®©otf
t&lj corasma, is written corato, from a thief the
affix #«K>, to, being substituted instead of the termination
C3e>3, smd: — also ©oisw?, pitito, and ©£<?<stt, matito, the
£ of 0<i£, pitu, and matu, being changed into § before
this affix.
The adverb Hence , is formed by means of this affix, subjoined
to the letter $ , which is substituted for t®. ima, this ; —
ato, of the same meaning is formed by adding the affix,
to qp, substituted for eta, this; as, deotto. etto;
kuto, whence , is formed by subjoining to *g, the sub?ti«,
tute W *£., kiM,
The affix, @>«r, is also sometimes used as a substitute for
the seventh case \ as, for 3® ., adismiM, is written
adito, in or at the beginning; 6ditopaJ)|>h&ya,)
from (in) the beginning -
.m and d> form adverbs of place ; and to the latter a is al-
W a ys joined; they are given to the seventh or locative, case ;
Ex: for t:©C3©., sabbasroiM, may be written tf ©sa, sabbattrai
or wS}3$, sabbattha, in every place, every where; attra,
Digitized by
Google -
PALI GRAMMAR*
#«*), attfia, herty herein , in this place , ettha, 1/1 /Ao/ place %
therein^ there , -agcg, kutra* «gS6, kuttha, where, wherein, in
what place .
The affix 8 being subjoined to », the substitute for «?•,
Ium, what f forms 38, kva, where ?
The affixes l)iM, ?£•, IjaM, Ijiw vanaM, are sub*
joined to sg, ku, substituted for the pronoun «S*, kiM, what ?
and form respectively kuI)iM, -ag&>, kuljaM, *g*£*©<s> f
kul)iMcanaM, wAcre ?
The affixes <8., l)iM, and l)aM, are subjoined to the pro*
noun ta, and form respectively taljiM, taijaM,
Mere.
The affix eSN, IjiM, is subjoined to the pronoun ya, and
forms cfl4v, ya^iM, a?Acre (relative,) or whenever*
The affix <l£>, l)a, and Q, dha, are subjoined to f , substituted
for the pronoun § •), inaa, /Am, form respectively f to, ilja, and
fS>. idha, here .
The affix 3, dhi, is subjoined to the pronoun sabbo,
ally and forms CS©!?, snbbadhi* every where .
The affixe Cp da, in subjoined to *», ka, and the affix <2,0
Wy dicanau, to ^g, ku, substituted for the interrogative pro*
noun kiM, what 9 and form respectively kadi, .and
agC^Qeft*, kudkcunatf, whtnf at what time ?
The affix, c, is subjoined either to the pronoun C3s©o, sab-
bo, a//, or to its substitute and forms &©?,, sabbadd, or
ttC,, sada, always y at all times.
The affixes dani, and di, are subjoined to the pro*
noun *», and form respectively *»c,w, tadini, and esc,, tada
then , at that time .
The ai$x e8, jja, subjoined to % substituted for the pro-
noun t®, ima, /Am, forms epdS', ajja. /o rf/ry / the affix, eE? jju,
subjoined to C3, substituted for C3®3«^, saminu, likey or
eveny forms tfttS > sajju, immediately, and subjoined,, to qptto*,
•para, after } forms Sj, aparajju, the other day.
Digitized by LjOOQie
w
PAM OltAMHAD,
. The affixes ralji, dbun£, £,►??, diui, Are Subjoined
in their order to the following substitutes, for the pronoun §e^
ima, thin, (Sen, eta, 9, and §, forming C$«>® Jtc, etaret)i,
adhuni, fc,e». id&ni, rwao.
The term 99 § | kW?, ivuso, used in addressing an equal or
inferior with affection or tenderness, is indeclinable; as, ©.
«fj§*C39, tvan tvuso, or «&•€*» tum’je &vusa
The following is a list of indeclinable words of every dew
scription, Adverbs, Conjunctions, Prepositions, Interjections,
Particles, and. Expletives.
109. ritEPomioNs, GOtSacscsVyupasaggo*
There are twenty in number; viz.
I. O, pa, Forth, forward, fbr, off, away, ('Lat. pro . )
5. cjdo, pari. Back , backward , otfScf aS, parfijaya, defeat.
9. <3, ni, Concealment.
4. ■&, ni, No, not, nay.
6. £, u, Above, upon, upwardt.
6. g, du, Hardly, with difficulty , badly.
7. »•, saM, United, with, like.
8. ©, vi. Sometimes means Disunion, separation, and priva-
tion ; as, away ; apart ; or Hke di, dis, un. '
9. 90, awa. From, down from, off, away , the opposite of 99 ,
A, to, at.
10. 9«J, ana, After, in point of place, time, degree , or relation;
the reverse ofttS, abhi, before. In composition it often signifies
according to, in imitation of, behind, following, in pursuit of
1 1 . e 5<J, pari, About, around, surrounding, ineirclmg-
19. 9 ©, adlii. Over, above, upon. It implies superiority, ia
place and degree, and is the reverse of 90.
19. 9<0, abhi, Before, in time and place, the reverse of 9*2»
*fUr. •
14. oS, pAti, ~A gainst, fir, bach, back again.
15. ce, su, Well, easy, very, the reverse of £.
16. 99 ; A, To, at, as far as; the reverse of 9©v In comppailswi
4 Digitized by Google
71
PALI. BftAMMAA*
with certain verbs it reverses the ftetion; as, <•?§•, dituw, togivt >•
*Wc,«a 4 . nd^tuM, to tnkc; t»e*3 sg, gantoM, to go, qprocnoBttgaiK
tu, to come , 4^.
17. S, ati, Beyond, in point of lime , place, and degree. In
composition it often implies excess; as, very, very much, exceed*
ingly, dre.
18. ^0, api, Also , even , ' . . *
19. apa, C/wcfer, beneath , the reverse of *S5, adfii.
It implies also privacy , concealment, disappearing, lost # and it
often employed in a bad sense.
20. upa, iWar, iy, /Ac sk/c ®tYA # the opposite of g.
110. indecli nables, consisting of one syllable only.
1. 0, ca, And , also ; this conjunction ie a mere expletive, ,
2. «>, na, No, not, a privative particle.
3. 0, va, An expletive .
4. ©0, v&, Or, indifferently, (this or that.) ' *
6. ®0, m4, A particle of prohibition, and forbidding .
43. &, l)i, For , because,#* expletive .
7. c3, dhi, An expression conveying Afeapte, reproach / as, ^
for shame,
8. 0, ci, affixed to some words gives them ail mdefinite sign
nification '
9. ku, Bad, ill, mean, wile , Utile ♦
10. tu, ^fwd, loo, also .
1 1. nu > ^ particle of interrogation*
12. «■©, c e, i/I
13. ®<5, re, ^ disrespectful term of address.
14. l)e, -4 vocative interjection,- m, s>&De»c£g, l>epuriBii y '
O nitfft/
15* <s>Cd©, sve, To-morrow.
16. ®>0, ve, Verily , certainly, indeed; it denotes disunion, sepa-
ration, division , distinction, and sometimes privation/ as ,<may,
% a
apart; or the inseparable preposition, (H,dis, un, Jfc. .
17. ®8o, vo, An expletive meaning ^ww, i * . .
Digitized by nOOQie
72
RALI GRAMMAR,
18. «>©"), kho, A expletive meaning and, also, moreover*.
ID. #w, no. When used in composition as an expletive, is
like our 120 , not .
20. •cdo, to, From.
21. efl*, yaM, Something , moreover .
22. 23. naM, «>•, taac, Sometimes are used as negatives,
and privatives,but generally mean, that «
24. kiM, fPAa* ?
111. indeclinables, of two syllables. .
1. Ijanda, Therefore .
2. «S5, kira, 0 / 50 .
3. ©©, eva, So.
4. «&£>, kiva, //oa>
5. coo©, ydva, Un/tY.
0. cao©, tava, 17/1^7.
7. ©w, vata, Verily truly .
8. <? ata, So and so , /AiW, moreover , then, yet, where-
fore , owrf 0 / 50 , it is much used as an introduction to a near
sentence and is often redundant.
9. epco, agga, ^4 respectful term of address; again ; a term of ridi-
cule and reproach . \
10. f*», iMgha, Therein, therefore.
11. *oc5»&, taggha, And so, therefore , wherefore . '
12. qo*), ama, Yes, indeed.
13. «£>3®, nama , Also, moreover.
14. nuna, Verily, truly. ,
15. Of50, puna, Again , rapidly .
16. co«o, pana, ^4&o, likewise,
1 7. alja, interjection of calling .
18. tsoo, sal) a, J4i/A.
19. @230, musA, False, falsely.
20. C3»«jO, sakkd, Ability , power , like oirccm*
2 1 . q©«oo, labbba, Receiving, obtaining.
22 . s&oc&o, IjefcfchA, t/wfer, beneath .
Digitized by LjOOQie
PAI4 <UUMXAJU
79
63. **5% Distant^ fur off.
24. 6<5q^ dur£, Distant , /ar o^.
23. if©), divd, Day tune.
26. 8*530, vin&, fFitioMfc unless* 'if not , except.
27. wa«n, n&n&, Various , different 9 manifold .
28. cp©3, odftfai, Rightly, truly, clearly , evidently, justly.
29. §©o, muddM* Summit . Bui in composition gcneratyf
means, in rain.
30. S 1 ©^, rniccha, False.
31. qpo©, avi, Manifest , iff rigAt.
32. Wt»S, sakkhi, Before , in presence of
83. t3©3, sacchi, Before the eyes, in sight.
34. W©, saSi, Wholly , altogether .
35. ©^,bal}i, Out, forth, not in.
36. oo<j, yadi, JVoo>, tAen, if.
37. f 8, iti> So, tAiw, in iAi# manner, that is to say*
38. «K$5)65} kitti. Manifest, in sight of.
39. epsb, atthi, Having.
40. CiD-oB, svatthi, i/ai7, peace to withy out
41. etao€d, sotthi, Health.
42. ©tit, khalu, Indeed, verily, truly ,
43. «50«p, nanu, /s an expression used in stating a question in
an argument; as, «53«p, nanu, is it not ?
44. «»©, kimu, 7PA«J • what then ?
45. ce*c 5MB, yagghe, FAen, therefore, (interrogatively}
46. to*©, sace, if
47. 553*©* Ijave, Indeed, verily, truly,
48. Tg*©, suve, Tomorrow .
49. qpetf, are, ^fn interjection of calling , used to animals.
50. pure, Jn tAe beginning.
51. <53*5)0, namo, respectful term of address.
52. & 061 , tiro, Across , cross wise.
53. adho, Down , low , below .
54. qpeeno, ato, Afterwards .
x
Digitized by LjOOQie
PALI GUAM MAH’*
t4
55. qo&r, alio, A respectful term of address , an exclamation of
wonder or surprise .
56 ? raljo, Secretly.
57. c8*cO£J, bhryyo 3 yf Aff/zdawf, abounding.
58. i>j#o?DS3, Ijiyyo* Yesterday .
59. cpseft&rt, anto, Between 3 among* betwixt , within.
60. C30**o:), p&tOj Day AraiA, »ery eor/y i/z <A« morning.
61. C3^*, sudaM, expletive.
69. *»0C» 3 kallaM, Dexterity , healthy good .
63. CSS*, evaM, 7'Ai/$, i>i /Ais manner , jo*
64. Q8*, dhuvaM, Every.
65. 66. »laM> *> a l aM > Enough , sufficient.
67* TScOty oay aMj Expresses possession.
68. CSOod., sayaMj Evening.
69. t3®*, samaM, Likeness.
70. €3 j® •, s&maM* About, round about.
71. «oS>., karoaM, 7r#7y, wri/y,
72. C30d'*, paraM ? Opposite , oh *Ae other side.
73. ©5., oraM, Ow the other side .
74. ©O' •, ciraM, Long time.
75. Cgd*, The other world, a future state.
76. al>aM, Day tf/we.
77. tS£*D # , saljaM, Forbearance.
78. £©•, uccaMj Exalted^ eminent^ excellent .
79. «£©•, nicaM, Debased, low , mean .
80. t34M", §akiM, ottcc.
81. »©•, eaddhiM, With) together.
111. indeclinable?, of three syllable**
1. athava, Or.
2. antara, Between . .
3. *0cr«&3, arak£, Distinct) jar
4* ©0iJDc5^, bdl)irS, <?«/, outside.
6. QttQssfi,yhvQit£ } Sjomuch } abQUt that*
Digitized by
TAjA GRAMMAR, .
TJ
0. tdwat£, About, about that, so much .
7. 8* cs©«5»0, samantd, WO®«5X»o t sdmantd* Round , about .
9. imanta, /fn interjection . .
10. e0g©3, saniraukha, In the presence of (from V with §)©S
face*)"
II- C3<50©a)\ pararamukhd, Absent .
12. 13. 14- &<?&?, cara^i, coitS, taralji, tSsteaJ, sampati,
These three are expressions of consent; as, now , therefore.
15. qoaoS, dyati, Future.
10, upari, Above, upon .
17. ooo©*^, ydvade, Until then.
18. tavade, ^7/fliY <Ai>.
19. *nSc6*, tiriy aM, Across > cross wise.
50. tteftas*, sanikaM, Quickly, hastily.
51. C3t3«&*o>, sasakkaM, Quickly.
1 12. i ndeclinab les, of four syllables.
1. dso^d'i.", fctarehi. Now, this time.
8. ©OOJ:©^, ettavata. About that, so much.
3. *£&) c.0 i)«P, kittdvntd, /Zozp much*
4. qp«£25^sd, annadattha, Verily, truly.
5 . #COcO»3^., seyyathidaM, How*
113 . iNDECLiNABLEs, of five and six syllables.
1. 9<S>CO©««o®, appevanama, Therefore .
2. tBsC30®s5K5))a«, hhtsoaiattdya, Abundantly , abounding.
The above* and all oilier words, which have neither gender,
number, nor ease, are termed nip4ta, indeclinable par -
tides; as, '£©*<H‘9ss£b, uccaMrukkho, w?. a high tree; £©»(5*»9,
cucaMlata,/. a A/gA vine; uccaMsaraM, «. o high house •
114. o*t««5£)o, rukkho, A tree , declined with £©%
Singular.
1. £©• <S\,aes&) 9 uccaMrukkho.
2. dies©-, rukkhaM.
3. rukkhena.
Digitized by LjOOQie
PAl.t OrtAVM/m. '
TO
1
4* rukkhassa. ;
6. cfii^S© «®D, rukkhasmfc.
G. rukkhaasa*
7. dtssfl£)9o, rukkhevS.
8. , oV-c^sD, rukkha.
So also are declined QOW and C35., without any change
in the particle £@», but this is the only indeclinable particle
which can be affixed to nouns in every case.
115. The indeclinable particles denoting case, vihhak* *
ti; self, qptwxo, atK ; action, kriyi ; place, desa ; time,
t9@c0 or 4Stt£; side or quarter , Jjeas, di»£, cannot be applied ta
nouns in all cases ; but are subject to the restrictions mentioned
below.
1. Particles denoting Case , ean only preeede nouns in the
7th case; adhi, and ante, are particles of this
description.
2. Particles denoting Self, can only precede nouns in the 3rd
and 6th cases ; such a particle is C3cc% sayaM.
3. Particles denoting Action , can only precede nouns in the
1st and 2nd cases.; is a particle of this description.
4. Particles denoting Place , can only precede nouns in the
7th case; ettcf*) p4raM 9 is a particle of this description,
5. Particles denoting Time, can only precede nouns in the
1st and 2nd case; <;©0, diva, is such a particle.
6. Particles denoting a particular region or quarter , can
only precede nouns ip the seventh case; e&edj, IjepJpha, is
such a particle.
7. Tiie particles O and © can only precede nouns in the first
case.
8. The particle can only precede ncuns in the 8th case.
1 16. Prej ositicus must be prefixed to some noun or verb, and
cannot stand alone, but adverbs and other inde^linables may
be used in au unconipounded state ; as, C3fc&o#do, pahdro ? #
Digitized by LjOOQle
PALI GRAMMA*.
n
blowy from and pat) a rati, he strikes, from the
tame; — but ttao©, sica, she and, •»;)©, soca, he md ;
&> bh4sativi t»d<5om©D, karotivi, he speaks or he acts: have
tbe particle affixed.
117. Nouns, o®, aima, are of four classes via. sack at are
only of one gender ; those of two genders ; and those of thrto
genders ; and those of no gender, or indeclinable*.
Nouns are so called, from the root «£>&, nanta, which aig.
nifies to bend, because they are bent to various meanings.
End of the Indeclinable words.
CHAPTER Vt
ON TOE FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS,
called sam&sa.
118. Of the Jirst species of compounds , called
kammadb&ro.
Compounds of the first species are 1 for the most part formed
of nouns substantives, preceded by their adjectives ; these lat-
ter having their terminations suppressed, and the substantive*
alone being inflected ; as, instead of
mat) on toe a soviroca, is written ©toSJeKfO, ma^aviro.
Nouns compounded in this manner are called C3©7«f)0Q<a3<f
•^0. samanddhikaraNo, from the noun substantive aud noub
adjective Being both in the same case, and ejSoCMesttKWD©*
sama6antan&ma, because the final word is a compound term*
In tbe three species of compounds, drstingmished by the names
W6S)D*$69, kavnmadh&ro; (|whik1o; tanpu*
risa, the final term only is susceptible of a variation ot gender.
The species of compounds called ©fc/S'lA babubbiiji, ere
epithets, and consequently subject to phnngo of gender^ like
ppj^mon adjectives
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
fS
PAX«T GRAMMAR.
<f*5X3&t3©, rattapjn, a woman who wears red cloth , instead of
<J*SKX3C30, rattapa{)i, the noun in the compound form being
preceded by the adjective in an uninflected state;— also,
t3€*>, maljasaddlia, instead' of nm^antisaddha, a
very faithful woman ; t^goos'j niluppalaM, instead of ojQ*
CCO0*, ntlaM-uppalaM.
The thing to which another is likened is often put in a com*
pound of this species; as, ce€d!33eh, saltbisduia, a woman re -
gcmbling a sword y instead of C3«Qbj8G3,)a): salthiivas&iua ; §©9
#«;o, mukhacando, a man with a face like the moon , instead
of ®©*CJ 8 ©ofcjr^ mukhaueva cando.
The adjective generally precedes its substantive in com-
pounds of this species; but in sorre cases it may cither precede
or follow; as, ©*3X5^3 khattiya bhuto, or tg ^©*»5
Cc33. bhutakhattiyo, one who was a king or khattiyu .
In compounds of this species, an indeclinable word is some-
times placed before the substautive; as, asuro, not a
deity , from and trd also, qpejzexfjanassa, not ahorse, from
tpc£>, substituted for ^ privative, and assa, a horse
apunageyya, not a vtrse , from <y, t-erjand # 5 fccS».
When a numeral precedes iu a compound of this species it
Is termed digu; — for tayoloka, is written,
4Soqd«a«, tilokaM, three worlds , «8 being substituted for
the nominative plural feminine 5 loknn, the neuter sin-
gular being substituted, for the nominative plural
feminine.
In this manner any other noun may be compounded with a
crude numeral, the second term being made neuter.
119. Of the second species of compounds , called soeo
tap pur iso.
This species of compound is generally formed of two nouns
the first of which was in any case but the nominative er voca*
live as in the following examples of each case*
Digitized by LjOOQ le
PALI QUASI MAE.
; ft
In the second case:— Instead of crog g&maMgato, who
is gone to the village is written e»>S)cfc»®^ gamagato. But in
the following passage the sign of the case must be retained,
passavasi[)|>ha g&maMgato, See % Wd*il -
tha is gone to the village , and so in other similar passages.
In the 3rd case: — Instead of tfesj ranndhato, i g
written rajatjato, destroyed or put to death by the
king /—instead of ee30te3Ke(3®ofl^fO?, sonelji ley\okfipo,
is written sona leyyokupo, a well (that
f ’f the water of it) licked or rather tapped \ by a dog; — instead of
dadhin& upasittaM hhojan&M, is
written dadhibhojan&M, food mixed with butter
milk . '
Instead of ^Qwo«)C^$9?, asin£kalaljo, is written
asikalaho, a war or strife with swords .
In the fourth case Instead of 6}Se£3 8*» buddhassadey-
yaM, is written 6}S) buddhadeyyaM, what is Jit or proper
to be given to Buddho.
The following compounds, being terms in grammar, preserve
the sign of the fourth case in the first member, P a *
rassapadaM, the voice for another; (the common active voice,)
3 C^*, attanopadan, the voice for self; (the people 9 aptive
voice.)
In the fifth case Instead of e©^crc&0£8a?«, corasmibayaM,
is written c5*, corabayaM,ycY/r from a thief ;— so also, in-
stead of 5)^03090) bandanasn.a nutto, is written
©€cD *:>® *tJ*5JD, baudhanamutto, released from confinement . '
In tbe sixth case Instead of d«.« 5 ?a£ 0 ^**5X50, rannoputto,
is written OOd'jeswi?, i£japutto,n king's son .
In some instances the sign of the sixth case cannot be drop*
ped. The following Are examples of this exception.
t£3 , brahma nassa ka/^adanta, the
Brahman's black teeth ,wd®«3^^oSocROc3ttO^ •, rannomiga-
dhas»adlianaM, the wealth of the king Magadha;—<S*G^2S§)
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
to
PALI GftAMMAIt,
#*£££& racffio assoca pmrisoca, the king's horse and '
tna/i ; but ogtfto^SXM, raono gurupatto, /Ac joit </
the king's tutor , may be written in a compound form ; as, dZtf
«g 5t^^«X0 f rajaguruputto.
In the seventh case: — Instead of rnpesafinij
is written 353, rupasann^L a mark in the person • Cer-
tain expressions conveying reproach or contempt, drop Uni
sign of the seventh case in the first member of the compound j
as, instead of kupemaNSuko, is written
kupamaNSuko, a frog in a welly a term applied to one of
confined ideas, ignorant of the world;— instead of
nagarekako, is written er>cfid«w#ajj?, nagarakako, a crow on o
city, applied to one who is always watching Jor an opportunity to
obtain something .
The sign of the seventh ca*e is preserved in the word
antevasiko, a pupil >
End of the e&ao , Sts CO®*ts, tappurisa samdsa.
120 . Of the third species off compounds , called ©OQ^sa, halju-
bbi[)i.
Compounds of this species are epithets of other words, and
consequently subject to the change of gender like adjectives;
Example.
In the second case Instead of qp?c (oS*s>t30) &gaf&
saniana )aMso, is written ^:x& eats ©•«?:, agatasamano, a resi-
dence of PriestSy a Viharo .
In the third case: — Instead of c9sd 3*53
jitani indriyini yenaso, he by whom his passions have been sub-
dued, is written 0, jitendriyo, an epithet of Buddha ;
cf)*5De>*D0 i^ito aggiyenaso, he by whom fra
is offered in worship , is written al)itaggi, an epithet
of a Brahmay which may, also optionally, be written
6Doeo 0, 6ggyal)ito: instead of
chinnarukkho yenaso, that by which a tree has been fetl*d 9 u
written & wwidv#«a£> 3 > chinnarukkho ; au ax*.
Digitized by LjOOQie
»AM OftAVMAIU
81
.In tie fourth case Instead of eSttttotr,
diuno suiiko yassiso, he to whom tribute is given, is written
^9xaes*aestt, Amnumiuko^a king.
In the fifth case: — Instead of eat£sh3>533*
niggat&jani yosmiso, that from which people go out y is written
45 &&&CB tS ^**>0, niggatajano, a village .*
,In the sixth case;— Instead of w dasahalS
myassaso, he zchose is the strength of ten , is written $«©£>£%
dssabato, an epithet of Buddho ; instead of e^-cb t3 a®0 octEJ
natlhi samo yassa so, he whose equal there is not, is writ-
ten tyC3£>®3) asamo, an epithet of Buddho; instead of e?Gow ef
pa^utajivl}aj r assaso, he whose tongue is broad , is
written etgSDcfoSfcfcO, paljutajivebd, an epithet of Buddho , who
can widen or lengthen his tongue at pleasure ; instead of
cfit£3#>C30, roa. anlipannajassaso, he whose wisdom is
great , is written mal^apanno, an epithet of Bud •-
dho ; instead of St3?C‘ ty«fcSoCt23*ttr, viealaM akkbiyassaso,
he whose eyes are broad 9 is written 8wo$ccs£Do visilakkho so
also cS0es£>Q@©D» paccakkha<lhanun&, a truly righteous one . ,
Instead of cae>®£o ectacsetso, sobhano gandhoyas-
taso, that whose smell k agreeable , is written ej sugandhi,
well scented; instead of ©fc>®8> saeft&ooo? ccttMotOD, baljavo
kantiyo yassaso, that which has many rays, is written ©C£4&
bal)ukantiko, the Sun; instead of ©cco8oer>£«cfiDa3
€£3*t80, bal}avo nadiyo yassaso, that which receives mani/ streams 9
is written ©4o«*>5j?#«>o, ba]}unadiko, the Oct an ; instead of ©
tfts$o ausoiowcf? oocacs^wo, bal)avo kattaro yassaso, that which
has many makers , is wiitten ©!r«t5305^«o, bai uUttuko,
being affixed to the last member of the compound.
In the seventh case:_Instead of
eOMnattd bal)avo m&tagg& yasmiifiaM , that wherein many e'ephaf ts
are, is written ©»X5&©*i}®2«>Cft* 9 mattabajjumataggaM, a forest . '
Instead of suvajjwaisa-
>iyavaatfoya«saao, he whose colour is like gold, is written eg
h
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
83
PALI OMAMMAB*.
aovavNavaNNOj golden , an epithet of Bdtldhf,
This species of compound is termed ta§a« 5 :oO»or, sam&uidhk
iara c r zrQ* tulyadhikarawa bal)ubbhil)k
Instead of ©So@t5o^®6&c4e5C5»W, vajiramp»uRn])i yassa-^
so, Aer i/i whose h<uid is the thunderbolt, is written
vajirapani, <?» epithet o/Sakra.
Instead of e<*.3®o«*i cftamtWo, erasi lomfoi yasaaee*
Ac on whose breast there m hair, is. written GtfSeQDwSft, urasi-
lonio, hairy breasted* to tkia example, observe, that the sign
of the seventh ease is retained, in the compound 5 — when the ease
is retained, the compound is termed Wtib&ea, a$upta*
Instead of 8 t 5 »«s«>eW, sa^a^etun^ye
vattateso, he who possesses a cause of goad, is written
e«ao, saljctuko*
This species of coo* pound is called pa|)ban>&njtay
because the last term is in the nominative.
Instead of We»wSoqtcSQx®>ceweo, satla \6 a^havd yete,
those which are either eight or nine , is written tetsxxeS, saltaf)*
|)ha, months.
Instead of t3©e» o® f*m cd*
dakkhiNassaca pubbass^cadisayaM antiu61aM>a, the point of the*
compass' between the South and the East, k written <;**,© dt
£©3, dakkhiNapubbfc, South East.
End of the bal)ubMl)k
131. Of the fourth species ef compound*, called 05»«J? y dwan(fo.
When t\vo or more words come together, each in the samer
case, and which, in the usual mode of construction, Would be
separated by a conjunction equivalent to and± they may be
formed into a compound of this species*
There ate two modes of forming compounds of this speeies;—
ib the. host mode, the oompound is considered as many ;
the lfeotword is therefore put in the plural lfUmber and in the
second mode, the aggregate kag>o/i <7 and the' Imh member*, it
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
TAXA GRAMMAS*
83
«on«equfetit]y, put in the singula* number ami neuter gender.
This last species is called cSmaoJO)* , «^DC*00w?33fc>*»» ekattaM na*
pUMsahattajM-' — neuter* ofiihe tame kind *
Ex. Instead of tgtf sxSo©, cahdoca stiriybca, thh
Sun and the Moon, is written © canda suriya',— s®
also «txte$ao<S*c3?, nartuiariyo, a man a toofntinf and ^es
akkharapadani, d letter and a word* The above are eom*
pounds ‘formed according to the first mode.
Instead of ©«&© $t3:*S)©, cakkhunca sotanea, the eye and
the ear , is written ©-aslSD cakkhusoLaNj-’-sQ also^w©^
a*
*»•, gftavaditaM, singing and music ; and instead of o3c»© >3X53
^©, yuganca najjgalanca, is written y uganagga-
I a m , a y oke and plough .
Instead of tfl5§©qp*C2£3"©> l)attMcaassoca,<w elephant and a
horse , is written tjattliassaM ;— instead ofcpfi©©!®
©, asica cammanca* a sword and a shield , is written, ^<9©3®s
asiccammaM ; — instead of fe}»t3;0 »)59at-30© # Sawsaca makasaoa,
gadflies, and gnats , is written ©*WiD«cCc*, SaMsanmkasaM
instead of «rt«^© kakaca ulukaca, crows and owls ,
is written kakolukaM;— instead of © OV:©,
namanca rupanca, the mind and the body , is written «£Ni)o w,
- pamariipaM.
These are compounds farmed according to the second .mode
the first is an example of the union of words signifying differ -
ent members of the body , cp©o3®09 avayavo; the second of wm-
sical terms ? S£<Scc%turiyuM ; the third of terms signifying subslun -
ecs intimately connected , &oc?QSX5)* y yog^aM ; the fourth of terms
signifying component parts of an army and military weapons ,
®W«D<Cfl M 8enagaM; the fifth of small animals , wormsj insects, and
ihe like , buddajantuko ; the sixth of different
animals which are natural enemies] SScDSo^©, vividhavirud*
dba ; the seventh of such things as are different in their natures 9
g3fc(a*)3C5&0, visabh£go.
J128, The following are further examples of the formation of
compounds according to the second mode.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
u
PALI GRAMMAR.
123. Words of different genders^ &&**' <$&•> bkinneliggsM
Instead of f«30^®C©, iuhica pumdca, is written f<53g®<*
itthipumaM, a woman and a man; ic^aad of C,S© c^tso©*
da*ica ddsoca, is written j^ea., dasidpsaM, a fvmale Stave and
a male slave ; instead of C6>OX5.0© 0 t'<5©, pattoca ci varanca,
is written C3«5X»‘3© cr«, pattacivarax* a bowl , and a prist's gar-
ment ; instead of cfcCOO© ^wo^^do©, gagg&ca sonoca, the rivers
gynga and soha, is written cLCOotOi«», gaggasonaM.
Numeral * •©*% saxkya.
Instead of *»**© ©^««s©«, tikanca catukkanca, fAree end
four, is written SsrG ££«££&», tikacatukkax.
Persons of different professions, 6o3, sippf.
Instead of sSaejy:© tfcSwoecy:©, venoca ratakaroca, a
basket maker , and a coacA maker y iu written #©«3O<503W<5., ve«
tiara thakaiaM\
Persons engaged in hunting, tuddako, or catching
game.
Instead of e304rg?5X§ow:© ®Oc»©ewo©, s&kuntikoca mdga*
vikoca, a bird catcher , and a deer catcher, is written t304$«*x2
«S)Os>Q*»., sakuntikamdgavikaM.
Inanimate things , epos !)«?, appdni.
Instead of ^p:#<5:© C3«oS©, dr oca satthica, awl and knife, is
written ^:(5C3oS, drasatthi.
Things used by Brahmans who are fellow students .
Instead of «»C9© eK^oo©^ ka^banca katapanca, a staff,
and the crest of a peacock, is written «aeS«:<5oe>, ka|)phakaidp&M ?
Trees, Shrubs, Stf, tfi®e5©),rukkho.
Instead of 0^>Bo© ©<*®c50©, dhavoca khadiroca, is written
08©^ <5*, dhavakbadiraM, and may also be written
dhavakadird.
Grasses , tixa^,
Instead ofgseft© ©£)^o60, munjoca babbajocq, two species
of grass, called in Singhalese, mudutapuj ap4 ©S^e$a|
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
»AM GRAMMA*. 7 *5
babustana, is written munjabalbajaii, which
may also be written munjababbaji.
Beasts , cw, pasu.
Instead of 9®C3(© cSgettS©, ajoca elajoca, n goat and a sheep 9
is written ajataka*, or optionally cp£t^4$3,aj*ittldu
Valuable artichs,Q*n*, dhanaM,
Instead of t3©«<^erio©, ^irannopa surawNO-
pp, gqldorpand gold, is written, either ea©*^****, J)i ?
ranna suvaNNaM, or C3©^*0$ >, ^iranna suvaNNa.
Grains , Q£3$£3g*, dhannaM.
Instead of t3:§© 0*©':©, salica yavoca, r/ce barley, it
written, either eo<3cs3©., saliyayaM, or tt0<3cc©0, saliyava,
Countries , janapadaM.
Instead of »?~© k&sica kosaloca, Kqsi and
Kosol , is written, either kdsikgsalaM, or *&?£
kasikosala,
^Abstract qualities', pf opposite significations, e»?S© StcToS}
ep$j£>, nicca virodhi addabbaM.
Instead of ages^*© kusalanca akusalunca, virtue
ftndvipe , is written, either -sg^C 0- ^ 3 ©** kusatykuaalaw, or
C'o-5gte0Q, knsalakusali. '
, pirds , fc3*a£®4tS£o, sakupo.
Instead of ©®»o©©go*P'©, bakoca balak&ca, a stork and
a small crane , is written, either ®*»6D(3 ;>*»•, bakabalakaw, or
©«)©(«0ef)0, bakabalaka.
Words denoting any thing produced from milk , ©osxfo;.,
vyfcnjanaw.
Instead of $©© «3«>©, da&ca ghatanca, sour curds , <7/7^ 01 Vd
Jw«er, is written $©?s«>., daSighataM, pr da$i»ha #
t£«i ? ,
Cardinal points or regions , ^ wa, disa.
Instead of £©)© ejtftf©, pubbarfca aparanca, East and West,
js written, either pubb&p^raM, or pubbar
Ppd of tbe 4th apepipa of poropouflds, palled dwpndo,
Digitized by
m
JRALl ORAM MAR*
124. Of Ike fifth spedesaf compounds^ called.
avyayibh&vo. '
A compound of this species has a preposition or other in*
declinable word for its first member, and a noun for its Just*
terminating in the sign of the neuter gender; and it is for tit*
most part indeclinable.
Thus from qc5, adbi, over, or upon y or toward , and f> sS, itthi*
to female, is formed the compound <?c}s9, adhitthi, in a neuter
form*
If the last member of the compound end in any letter but
tf, the cases are , invariably suppressed; and if it end in a long
Towel, that vowel is made short.
Instead of «r>cac5E£3 nngarassa samipaM, near to a
txly 9 is written tfpanagaraM, in which example, the
last term ending in y is changed into
When the sense will admit of it, the last term ending in <f
may optionally assume also the sign of the seventh case singly*
lar; as, £»«£>£>*( 5, upanagare by or near the city.
Instead, of cftftd&Qd abhavo makkhikanaM,
without Jlies y is written nimpiakkhikaM, from
without , and © «*© «>•, makkhikaM, a fly.
Instead of anupubbo theranaM, an order
pr succession of Priests , is written cfcnvaxf, anuteraM,
priests in succession.
The preceding are instances in which a preposition is the
first term of the compound;— in the following instances, the first
Jemi is sometimes a preposition and sometimes an indeclinable
pf a different species.
Instead of anatikkammasattiat, not ex*
* It is the opinion of some that the first member of a compound of
this species, slatuls ia the place of the sign of the case in the last
member, and that the preposition adhi, in tbia example has f *
effect of the seventh case*
Digitized by
Google
8 f
*AM
ereding (me 1 * strength,. i* written a?©OC$w£., yatli&sattia^ as-*
cording to one's ability** to tbs utmost of one's pettier*
Instead of yeyebuSSbd, /Awe who are old r i s-
written cS©;)£)Qd., yathabuSShaM.
Instead of tl8®Q&e>Cy SQVti, yattako paricchedo
jivassa, to the end of one's existence, is written cflo©5?©*, yava*
jivaw.
Instead of ApabbatakhettaM, a paddy field
as far as to the mountain , k written qoc <£>»*, apabhatou.
Instead of AjalantasitaM, cold as far as the
end of the water , is written qi&Qtsxs:*, ajalantaM. But instead
of G*«St»®o9^59,. uttainoviro, an eminently persevering or
strenuous person, is written crOstfo, pavir*>, a compound of tke
«0003*>tfo, kammadharo, species, and not paviraM.
And also, instead of 063©>f9J Os>05)3, visiJ)J>ho dham mo,
excellent law or religion, is written abhidammo, and
not qp&Q©®*, abliidhammaM.
Instead of s§©Ssd. ep«x5>, kucchitaM annaM, despicable food T
is written kadannaM.
Instead ofifoow*®©^ appakaivrlaranaM, bad salt , insttjjfc
dent in strength, is written kalavanaw; ®o* being^
substituted for -ag, bad* ■
Insteadof 2g®5seD3^<y©C30, kucchitopuriso* a despicable man f
iV written, either kipuriso*, or, •s^ <^©C30,kupuri3O i
but the last term of the compound does not terminate in the
sign of the neuter gender, and k declinable, like compounds of
the kammardh&ro, species. ~ *
So likewise, instead of nasuro,««f a &ity y is written
asuro, a Titan , <5jr.
125- In the species of compounds, called 9©TS<2t03e©?, avyayi-
bliavo, the first term is the principal one; in that called e»o &5
, , - ad
m&o, tappuriso, the last term is the principal one; in that called
4ft0$)05£0 < 3f karanadMrcy both teruis are equal iir importance;
Digitized by
Google
*ALT OftAMMAA.
#8
So als6 in that called ©<5>*©$\ dwando;— in that called
bapubbfhi, another term is the principal one.
End of the t3*Dot?ev©., samasakaNS&M, or Chapter on iho
formation of compound words. '
CHAPTER VIL
126. 6n the formation of derivative words.
The'present chapter treats of the derivation of one speciee
•f words from another; as, adjectives from substantives; and the
contrary &c. by means of ce rtain affixes and occasional modifi*
cations the primitive words:— This part of grammar is called
*&©»•* taddhitaw.
In forming derivatives by §©, vuddhi, augmentation , the
first vowel of the primitive words is, in the derivative,
changed ; if sf into cp?, if $ into ©, if £ into©.
Instead of ©fle9 visipphassa put to, the son of
Vasittha , is written ©ofi^CSl, vasippho ; instead of
Scao, vasippbassadhlta, the daughter of Vasittha * is written 03
<3cf>, \asipphl ; instead of ©0fie9c3M^tr©©*, vAsipphassa apac-
caM, the offspring of Vasittha * is written ©oflCS., v&sipphaM.
Instead of qcaS©., kaccassaappaccaM,{Ai offspring
ofKaccaha , is written kaccAyano, or a*©© 0 ®«*) 3 ,
kaccdno, by means of the augments qpooflw, A) ana, and
Ana. This could not be written »o©©, kacca, because the aug-
mentation by §©, vucldhi, does not take place when the final
letter is doubled. These augments are termed eoooecft, nAyana,
and nana ; the letter being prefixed to signify
that the primitive must be augmented.
Instead of 8c£>Qttc0<p&&6>., vinataya apaccaw, the offspring
of Winatd y is written veuateyje^ or Qtftom
Digitized by
Coogle
PALI' GttAMMAAi
sm>, vinateyyo; the affix *4o30*» Neyyo* eyya*
that with or without augmentation, being subjoined
to tbe primitive^
Neyyti, and das^ eya, that is, with and without
augmentation, affixed to words/farm* derivatives signifying pro^
priety, or fitness ; as, instead of : ^a»©^^efl®<weae20*t*)j dak-
WiMi&rii>ate yassaso, he to whom a gift is presented, is written 1
dakkhtNeyyo, a person meriting a gift*
4n* i*i, that js y* with -augmen tat ion of the first vowebofth*'
primitive, in all eases, except when preceding a- compound*
consonant, forms patronymics ; as, $«8©,‘ dakkhi, the son of
JQ(ikkh**
<*>
<4* 5^ Nika, that is yeft, ika* with augmentation of the first
vowel of the- primitive, with the same exception, forms patrony-
mics; as, instead of C S*w*£qxxt£3 *»€©•, sakynputtas^a
apaceajt, an offspring or descendant of Sakya, i9 written C3*»*'
ejtSO ?#*»?, sakyaputtiko*
©, ba, which isafterwards doubled, forms patronymics >• as,
€©*£)}, ina»3abbo, bhitubbo, the son of Mando*
the son of BMlu*
4Si£), nava, thati**0, ava, with au^mentation, form« jwr-
tronymics y as, instead of ®*£e>sr:o y»S©«. manuno apaccau,
the offspring t cf Mann, iswritten mdnavo*
odacT, Nora, that is 3 0, era, with augmentation, forms po*
txonymice^ as, instead of C3©4*QBtj#OT&o, samanassa put to,
I Ac offspring or pupil of a Samana or Priest of Buddho > is written*
siipatiero,
Nika, that is f «>, ika ; with augmentation* but occa*
sippally. without, is applied in a very extensive application, in
fcucipipg^ajd^ectives # as will be seen in the following examples;
as^infttdad. of c$t»£s£*3 C3.C3^e6 , ghateimsuMsaf^bo mired wilh %
cfaxififdr butter^ is written »;>*»s>«r, glidtiko ; instead of
£P0.&S». utumpena taratifj, Ac fwbo^ climbs* or goes*
ulumpiko, which may alsof
a
Digitized by Google
MU &B.AXMAX*
m
written without ongmentotiox, ulompifey
instead of ©t* euti, aakat>eaa caratlli, he. (who>r«fe»
in a chariot, i9 written .ws**.©*#®?, 'tekafuko, a Charioteer,*
insteed, of tjp#ta iP^8Wt«i’*, siseitara^atfti, he (who) carries on.
fi&htad, is written tsda«0, sfciko.
. Oceaan, eyyake, and Nnka, or OSW, aka, with aug-
mentation, form adjectives--, but are only affixed to nouns in tho>
feminine gender; as, instead of ©S®ocevjte>«P, campfyawj&to,
Ofte barn in. ChampA, (a city,) is written ©•SOcMsoesw,
catnpoy.yaho; so ako Qo3?-tfaeMc0i*o«p9. b&ra Naseyyako, erra
born i» Bfamasi, (BeosurU.)
Instead of -sptS-ewOcTDa:' CkSS, kusiN&r&yaM vasatiti, ho
zfka resides in Ku»nora s (a, city,) m written o«wfl»r.^5o«io^
kosiaerako, an inhabitant of Kusinara. This affix is also applied
t# signify the whuHUtvt or a. chief of a district or country,- ( tf-mts
Q» v janapiidaN^> a, instead of ®3»®£>8w5&© ' enc3M«S£0®^o£3 r
magadhevnsatitivd tassissarevff, is written @lx»0tf«SM, maga»
(Jhokp, m inhabitant or chief of MtigariMa, (Bahar.y
Cgloat^cA*, ajiniyya, is used in. the foxmatinmof adjectives ;
as, instead of qptt&eK&oe-) &&*&', assaj&tiytt visij)J)ho, distin-
guished, from the race of horses, » written tfcaad^oioO^ assa-
j^nivyo.
553 ^, Sa, is used; ia forming adjective*; as, instead of e$&£&
«o£ie<’4;«.S^ ageantif) nitabhaw, that re /rich ought to be ac-
counted chief ia written tpcscoaptsf, aggaffifaM, the affix being'
doubled.
«D«», nika, is used as an affix, with the foBbwing words,
which it converts into; a dj ectives
Wends signifying reading or learning, g® saaa, adhfto; action,
sfsossd, koto; assembling, sanordhfrno ; appoint-
ipg^SoiOtOmsfio, niyogo ?arHor. science, Get; sippaM: goods, V. 3©“.,
lieffihood, t§8«> jlvikasr; destroying , ?r®cjO r ljafo,
4^1; a (v instead of «|it®S)3®»-S>W5noa; abhtcHrammamadhfteti, he
qfcbfWfk Vj slmUcatha. Abbhidhamata, or discourse tiddrersed 'bif
Digitized by
Google
TATA ORAttltMh ©1
ButidkOto the Devdtde, is written **CQ£®*»W, 4bhidha«»niko,
or without augmentation saw), abhidhamnriko.
Instead of ©€>CJ3 e»e»* vacesi katan kantamM, a
thing done by speaking i» Written £>o©e«s», vacasikan; also «
thing done by a man, s >o««S«r-, uianasikaM-
Instead of W<S»<3" tS«r*b)Q'i’*-3 sarlre sannidhdna
VP da u a, pains or sufferings collected or brought together in th e
tody, is written l Z'S&Ssow, sdrirHtsu
Instead of dwareniyi’.tto, appointed to re~
tnain at the door , is written dovirifca. .
Instead of 3 efi»^SXJ (ScxjoTW. yinaassa sippati, he whose
science is that of the lute , is written veaiko.
. Instead of csyrScDj eptSUtOgDoiOJ, ganlbo assa hkanSonti,
he whose goods are perfumes , is written <5}er3.»w>\ gaud hike. •
Instead of @®c© tfisnB C>) {?c'a»3?,jnage£auatv4 Jfvatili, he
who gets his livelihood by hunting, is written (aJacBQsto.J, niiga.
viko.
Instead of e*s><3«> to??D0, jalena Jjato, destroyed by a net,
is written tS><5®*tW, jaliko*
Instead of C3 suttenabaddho, tied by a rape
or cord , is written M?5KS«a»j, suttiko.
Instead of ©0®e0 «?C£S cipoaasa ivudboti, whose
weapon is a bow ,. ie written capiko.
Instead of ©■J»e»o <fC£5 «f3®3s©i<8, vato assa ibidhott,
whose disorder is wind,is written Q3©J®«®3, viitiko/ . •
of © 5 >© c5C4»«j>W>o, bnddbepasaiinO) pleased With
Buddha, is written ©©*>«w, hoddbiko. '
Instead of «»«>• «3©», ratten* kited bbavtSad,
goods bought with a cloth, is written £)«&>»*, vatthikA!*.
Instead of agdfWoeftMM#®'!**). ®t»t3.53(3©3,
ftutidjoassapariniktraM tamafabati tesaMi tisivk, Whose size is that
of a Kumbha, or whose worlfl is equivalent to that of a Kumbha »
mdt heap ofKumbhm, (masty) is written kauildko.
Digitized by
Google
1MLT Ato.
I*
Instead of ^©&£,akkh*tta rfibbfttiti, Ac d&kdplays
uith dice , is written akkhiko, a gambler .
Instead Of ®c 5Sa4D£W«'C36#»3S©?, magadheva sati j&totiv&,
he 4 who 1 resides or is born in Magadha, (Bihar,) is written ®^
€£&•«&, magadiiiko.
**, na, that is a, with angmentation, is 'used as an
affix, and forms adjectives with words signifying colouring Or
dying; as, instead of »ao^Q«r>crt»y*, kas&venarwttaic, died
or stained mlh turmeric, is written wM30©., kaeav&M ; so also,
nflaM, and o<»*, pftaM, blue coloured andydlow coloured .
' Instead -of ma^isassa idaM, (his belongs to a
buffalo , is written .©OCfctS*, mttyisaM.
*8o also, the componOd'cTCcf r&japorisaM, king's suit*
the last member having its first vowel augmented.
Instead of '© sjQoodscbo coerttSssoo etfatt
roagadhdgato tattraj£to tassissaroso assanivaso
tiva, one come from Magadha , one born there , its ruler , or owe df
dts'inhabitants, is written ©Ocfc^Qo, m&gadho.
Instead of kattikidlljiyutto, appertain -
fog fo Me constellation , *Be5*§a», kattika, is written'fctfti^
kattiko, Me month of November ; the first vowel nOf being aug-
mented, because it precedes a double letter.
Instead of 6}*©;) buddbo a$sa deValttij
JJuddho is this man's deity , is written 6>.©j, buddbo.
Instead of *£»3«c5^ cp®£© v>akaraNaM &v$Ja
fcdbiteti, id written,' #0cCO^a>5«)^ 5 veyvakaraNo, a grammarian
Instead of CCc»»<5c3 * 3 * 5 . 0 , sagare^i nilihatto, ds writ-
ten "t3K»s>aTC9 Saga ix>, fen. /
f®, ima^fed, iya, kija, are used aseffixes in the for^
roation of adjectives the two first express production > besides
many other meanings ; as, instead of p£tfqaS#«o, , pacchajat^
born last , is written pacehimo.
Instead of '©%2«i$^»cOT^ m^iwsBajiUya^jito, bom
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
FAEI Off Amt* It. m
inihchuttdn ¥atty (that is 6f the human r^e,>re^rHtt*ir®«fJClte
eSeDoedo, manussajatiyo, a human being .
Instead of -cpoora 'ante nijetto, /arZjfa«wtfor
yoked, is written, either aiUimo t or <r< 9 X&Md?, *&*-
yo+ the last of a s tries.
So also qScD ieafo, andhftklyo, inhabitant of drifilfaka*
Jnsttadot qv&*t<33&, puUo assa aUhili/ Ac 'ttfAo has
m son, is, written puttimp, or vp59&»& o, pnttiyo,
- « father or fartnt:
So also «cB©jGc, kappiyo. .
46 A niya, or &jS, lya, that is dte, iya, with mid without
augmentation, form adjectives, which signify what is ugr&uble
or fit / ns, instead of 6i^)t»c^^«vi>andhatias80j)Wi>aM^
'£aus$ for binding, is written &@tD«ftoc*, baiidhanjyAW, .JUjfor
binding or fit to be* bound.
Instead of ©^ts^qc^w** cawkamanassqljitttM, agreeable
for walking, is written ©•<» ©»?<«•, chankamauiyaw.
^fOdl, 4tu, is used in forming adjectives, attributive of, pos-
session; and generally imply an cicms- or abundance of the
quality expressed by the noun* to -which it .is subjoined;
instead of nbhijjkaba^ulo, hewhoObaundsist
* covetousness, is* written q^odSSpS, aMujjh&iij, covctous'S^c.
formation pf the degrees pf coiyperison mud , intensity ■ pf . 4 ^>
Jrclivcs .
•The affixes which serve, to form .the. degrees* of comparison
-and intensity of adjectives, ace ••»<?, tece, .to®, taitity j^MCjwp,
jssikaj.^cOj iyaj.tegj i^ha. as instead .of ^o3 u &* « es* /tpoc 83
•o3«3 e5Je>C33oi, ayamctesaM atisayena pipoti, this is th&mPft
sinfaloj iheseX persons^) 4s writtep C30CC»»d3,; pApatpro,. eaoo*
< m®5, ; pkpatamp, ,ex©cc5**»5, , p^pissikp, caQ#aj^ p4pjyp,«W
..j&aCSo, p4p.%tdw>*
All these 'affixes serve torjcslttlu, itttMe8y~.of tbetfdjec-
' ♦ive tp-wlueh,4bfiy wsyvbe.pffixed; i bat i it odoesuuotiappear that
Digitized by LjOOQie
»AXA aaAMHAlU
ttey *»n be distinguished into tbs two desses »f <* Cesnpar**
live” and “Superlative.”
In the following, and some ether instances, the primitive
Mdyectnw undergoes an eaeraalons change before the affixes ^aS,
fya, and %f3, if>J>ha; as,
Primitive Substitute.
©0, vuddlia, »cJ'®a5«’,jeyyo, *6r *t®% j*£]Ao.
«3C3«S, pasatcha, tff, s a, ^CJoasS'jseyyo, e>54*^£»3, sefftho.
O, vi, forms adjectives of profession ; as, instead of *•*> £3)
*PG£3?«9:», medha assa attlnti, Ae (who) has wisdom, is written
•95)50, medh6vi,am<v
«, ei, *affixed, forms likewise adjectives of possession ; a*,
tapassi, the ia^t consonant being doubled,
ika, anddS i. are used in forming adjectives ; as, <J®
•ojo, daN$iko, or q©, daNtSi, a man bearing a staff \ ( Pilgrim. )'
vantu, affined, forms adjectives of possession, which
in the .nominative change into<fD? as, tgeog)2, guna vi,
-mlumts, 00 ^ 00 , pannavi, wise.
©<cd© 3, mantu, affixed forma adjectives of possession which
likewise i« the won* native change co» 0 into ^3; as, fc3<3©5,
estimi, honing a good memory; tOO*r©3, binuni*, having rays.
But when @eno», manta, is subjoined to qpOcg, ayu* the last
vowel of that word is suppressed, and qpe?* introduced be*
♦ween the noun end the affix ; as, tfoxtsS>\ 6yasin&, aged, vene*
Table .
wa, that is <f a, with augmentation, except where it is
, preceded^ by a double consonant, is an affix used in Forming
adjectives attributiye of some quality; ag, C5»®3, saddho, a
Miever.
©oS, maya, affixed to words, defibtes the material of which
*ny thing is made , or that of which it chief y consists ; as, instead
of £»£»., suvaNNenapakataM, made. of gold , is
written suvaffgamayatt, or c* f
*©va»*araajyaM p-*o likewise ©*«*>3®c0^ jnenomaya*, like
Digitized by Google
MM 1 ©RillWMLVrt/
tkw$Bl r ortpnAtimff erf thought, the^ final *ft of SXSft beiig
changed into ©, for the facility of pronunciation, v
The following affixes term€^:C3.©m^<5a*£>, saailiy4piraifo,
are used in forming ; ord inala Ac*
Sc 3, tiya; as, instead of di hna wpiir a TCor, tbm?
pitted by two, is written gt&awfl3, dutiyo, second;—* o like wise
c©<3s>eflo, tatiyo, tfried.
tha^ S>, ph a • aa, ca4uttho, fourth^ the d being
preceded b y ce»; and* chappho, sixth, the £> beings
doubled.
Instead of qp«0e5 a&Shena catuUhOj half fees'
than the Jhurth, is written <f€5S}*€)e&?, aSSuSSho ; instead of
aSShena dntoo, half (ess than the' second, i*
written drraSSho, or ^ diyaSShb; instead of*
<f«S©««)oi#Q!5C, aS^henataWyo, hcdf less than the third , #e
written q©g) & *co?. 9w aS5}ia,tiyo.
ma 9 masculine , ^©*®o,,pan*ftnrio \ feminine t C3©S, p^ncaj* .
mi, fifth, e©*s>e£>r*<5^w, pancannaivipuraui.
Instead of c?a»3©, gtcQ, ekoca daaaca, after it has , beer*
compounded as a % ©£5cJW«)Dt3, dvunda saiu&sa, is written. £$«*»!>
^t3 y ekadasa, eleven; the final cp of ek», in the compound
CSsB^CS^ekadasa, being made long.
So* also 0^C3, twadasa 9 ./a>*/rc.
Instead of e^w, tidasa, <*w, being substituted for eo, and the
of £t3, dasa, changed into d y is written terasa,,
thirteen .
Instead of ©T*qje?, catuddaea, fourteen, is sometimes written
©c£«, cuddasa ; the ^ of ©^, t eatu* being suppressed and §
substituted for ©. r
Instead of chadasa, stXleeri, h written solasa ;
t? y which afterwards becomes eC3?, being substituted for d and 1
<J being changed into ©.
Instead of^C^w, appadasa, is written qpe£b$C% appharasa*
tha qp of & being lengthened, and the g changed* iiate c*.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
MC
Mill: QUAMMAtt.
• Thsfeadctf&j'Qo, ia -substituted .in the word ®o©C3w, bavisa*
ti y twenty-two.
. s ® 4 nta, is used as an affix to express theoiidinal. numbers; as,
instead of ds»0*M«55«>3<5®A*O; ekadasanuajepuraNa; ie, writ- •
ten d esw^efreSb; eksdsMino, eleventh:.
<$; i*. is .used as .an affix to express the Ofdinhl. numbers in:
the feminine gender; as, C5«»0^c3, ekadasi, eleventh.
m&kii isiueedananaffix.a/ter certain numerals; asjnstea/fxif
dweparinaan^ni aeseti, that (which);
hns two, is written §*•» dwikaM.
iso also waft, tike, three.
Tbe-effixes «*<$! I, kan,.and.-dS^ that is? strand ft, with augment,
tetion, are used in forming collective nouns; as, instead of £)«$?>
tienm* uSjf&Mt. inanti*fc.&iiaMsam,ul)o, a. multitude of -men, i*
writtemsloe^tsa^wo, uidaussako, or eo^otxsa, menusso.
Instead of® and e?, is written €>a8», dwayaM, andt»as», ta-
yaM, tliefioal §tl>eing changed into- «r&, aya.
«oo, la, is also used as an affix in forming collective nouns ; as,
«50'»)'f»o, gamata, a multitude of villages, an O^kccjo, ndgaratd, a
multitude oftitiis. '
^UOTOJ.Nyatta, and sjo. ta, are used as affixes in the formation
, of abstract nouns, (eoaSodS, bh&varta,) ; as, instead of ©trJtJtXJ
too® SO, candassabhavo, the nature of the Moon , is written
*5xa., candattaM* So also ©«oue$t5jC5s*, manussattaM, man-
hind.
So .also $®pss)‘, daNSittaM, the nature of wood.
So also C35j0«3tso}., pacakuttaM, cooking.
So also nilattaM, blue (colour.)
The firatexatrtple is classed, under the. liead.of tooS, bh&ve;
the second, under that of. eJ5fS, jkti ; the third.^Qs dabh*:; the,
fourth <§390, kriyd, the fifth t%dh, guna.
, T it« following are ex#pi.pl.es of abstract nauAs ffiepitd^y.the
affix ^**J 7 aj,tk*U* .cj} with,nu^jn*n^i<j 8 ,.
Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMAR.
1. pa s Sicca#, learning, from es® *aw, pas$i!o.
S. •«»oesQ2., kosallaM, cleverness, or purity, from agtte
kusalo.
3. cooSaajoj', s&maKSaii, absence from passionfcmn t3©#^3,
itinaNo.
4. ®eso»t 48 ., soljajj a m , friendship, from Cioee,, eu^ado-
5. &ty*8tXi\ porissaM, manhood, from gtfeeso, purisO.
G. ®maes«M93», nepakkaM, skill, from nipako.
7. taidvcso*, saruppaM, appearance, from C3<j\,A»e59, aarfipo.
8. ©tcfSes)., osabbhaM, the nature dr action of a bull,, from
©WCO, uaabha.
9 ©080% opammaM, the nature of an example, from ©C3®a,
upama.
In the first of the preceding examples, the » of the primi-
tive is changed into 0, and that letter doubled; in the second, the
final © of the primitive is doubled in the third, the final 4*,
is changed into sss®, and that letter is afterwards doubled ; —
in the fourth, the final ^ is changed into tf, which is afterwards
doubled; in all the rest the final letter is doubled, and in every
in stance it will be observed that the affix to is suppressed;
Instead of f Qt&n oboe©?, iaino bhdvo, is written, by means
of the same affix, tpiSeti*, Arieaan, the nature of an IrshA.
133. The affix CBS is further used in forming the following Ab-
stract nounf. '
^genr, niudati, softness, from ihudm
frdsocno, araljatn, ivortk, from aralja.
The affix tfetbnni attaua, is ato iised in forming nouns et|-
prenive of a particular quality; *s, puthuj-
janattanan, hoping umUMuedpOttions, from «,potujjaHa.
Instead of #«a©'eoA€>©» AkiSoanameva, is written, with the
affii At, nya, AkiSeafifian, if* state of having
' nothing.
Instead of kunSaniyiapaceaM, id written
tsmTQu&p&g, konSanno; the offspring of KuhidrUi the $ of
M
Digitized by
Google
»AtI GRAMMAR.
98
being, ia this instance, augmented before a double letter
contrary to the general usage.
Instead of 99c,cfl<SeD*, p&dayal)itaM, pleasant to tke foot, is
written cot#*, pajjaM.
Instead of C3*©9*s»ej5«fl*, dhanaya saMvattanikav,
mAifcA constitutes wealthy is written, dhannaM.
Instead of fc satino sambhutau, possessed
of understanding , is written Wg>, saccaw.
, Instead of ^5<e©9 3©, devo eva, even a god, is written, with
the affix «>% devata, a deity *
The affix that is q with augmentation, is used ,111 forming
derivatives ; as,
e>©C3® # , vesamaw, unevenness , from St3®, visama.
qyd&&*, ajjavaM, strait ness , or pc*O«>;t 0 ;>e©D, ujanokMvo,
from uju.
kaN» that is *s with augmentation, is also used' in the
formation of abstract substantives; as, manafma-
kaM, delightfulness , from manunna.
Oo dha, is an affix used in the formation of derivative words i
as, instead of ©«>*»«*> ©toooe&w, ekenarvihhagena, is written,
t5«»cDo, ekadha, in one manner*
®W;>, so, affixed to words, signifies nwtefe or manner / as, in-
stead of :c3<j©eooe«»«, padavibhagene, is written c^eeat>, pa*
daso, by steps*' > 0
©:, tW, and ©9X399, tbattA, are affixes, subjoined to pronouns
and signify manner ; as, instead of sabbe.
stapakarena, nr of/ awys, is written, ccgj© , sabbaths.
134. So also <f^^dt3KX9 r annalbatt4, fn another manner.
©•* thaMr is likewise affixed to pronoun* ; as, g»©*, katbak,
hoi r, from e» substituted for «£. r kiM, what?
§45©*, kihaM, *Aw$p from f substituted for § inia, the latter
CD being joined to the © of the affix.
* 6>?£Cgdv be^utth&M, mucky from ©a^ y ba^m
d, x, affixed to words, gives them the signification of
Digitized by
Google
YAM GRAMMAR.
» ,
\ 1
kara, and tg; as, instead of *©$«». ©<3 «:o.»«>5dS, amalinam
nialinaw karoti. is wiitten s)(§«i«®<3w, malini karoti, viz.
setaM, white.
Instead of «ftoeS@*«ft3 abhasmano bhas-
manokaraN&M, is written totsf bhasuiikaranaai, viz.
teased C£3, ka jjphassa, of firewood-
Instead of ep«<*?6 > ~' r i to©-*®, amalino malino
bkavatiti, is written maiiui bhavati, via. acjists':,
ceto, white. >
But ibis affix is not used in the instances ts3'tafd9K) gha'*
Jmstkaroti, «6»cOtO©®, ghafx^bbavati.
Neither in the instance.^S^stWD ®§«JMdcfl*8W) amali* !
no niaiino jiyate.
find of the chapter of derivative words,
CHAPTER VIII.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS,
135. et3©»«>, akkhy&ta.
The first class, or conjugation of verbs, is distinguished by
the name ^©of, bhuvadi; tg being the first root of that class.
‘ In many instances where the'root ends in a vowel, that vowel
is suppressed, in affixing the terminations; as, «f«w, aki, to mark,
4<99«b, akati, he marks.
136. The terminations of the present tense (S«RS©0®«33,
vattamano,) areas follow:—
C3rfcaC352^‘, parassapadaM. attanopadaM.
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.
1. & 1. •<» . «f9«ne»
2. S © S. e»C3
3 . © © 3. © »®CO
The tenses, tsoaQO, kilo, are eight in number; ami each
is distinguished by the denomination Stotsts, vibhatti
some of these parts, are included under the head of cyenw
Digitized by
Google
I00 > PALI GRAMMA % f
atita kriyfi, pasLaction ; ©«X»® ^*9, vgAmina kriy&,
present action ; qnsn&tn *§ao% anAgatakriy 4, future action .
The present tense, ©3»«bs>«5*S vattamaoo, or
paccuppannakAlo, is used to denote an act begun but not
ended, or the time now passing.
The past tense , atiUkalo, h used to denoto
an act finished .
The future tense, ai^gatakalo, is used to
denote an act not yet commenced.
The word which does not denote a substance, which cannot
be used without the aid of a noun,, expressed or implied, which
requires a agent 9 or an qbject , is termed kriyA,
The first six terminations pf the present tense , are distin-
guished by the term Ctfcaes^v parassapadaM, (denominated hy
Dr. Wilkins) “the proper form”; and so likewise they are disr
t'ijjguished throughout the eight tenses.
The first, second, and third persona singular aijd plural, of
both the patassapadaM, proper form , and qpowwwo
C3£*, attauopadaM, common form, throughout the eight tenses, are
distinguished by the teyms cr£)^ 8 o» paJ)haino,
majjhimo, middle ; £*3X3) «>©o, uttamo, last .
137 . The class of roots termed bhuvAdhi, from zq being
at the bead of the list ? insert the affix 9 before the terminations,
of the 8t5»So«) e>©$, vattamana pancami, apd
JjiyaMeni, tenses.
The affix c3, and other affixes, are inserted in like manner,
respectively between the root, and the termination of verbs of
the remaining £even conjugations.
Example;— trpm the root e©, paca, of tjie class , bhuvAf
di, «$30 ctSeo, sq» odanaM pacati, he cooks rice ;
tepacantij they epok tvaM paces*, thou cookestj
«g®®K)cr ©<5$, tuml} ; e pacattha , ye cook ; C5©0®, a^aif
pacAmi, I cook ; ®cc* mayaM pac&ma, we cook.
The above are examples in the copimon fornj.
'Digitized by LjOOQ ie
101
JS&. th* Rowing are in At proper form
ff®oc©#w v sapae| i^e* Ac cooks; ®0Ow©#era», tepseant*
they cook; S)* a©atf* tvaM pacase, thou cooked; «3©
#©frDj tillage pace v be, cooJy *&>i alpus paoe, / «©oA :
©si* a©0®€3CS), mayax pacdmlja, zce cook : r the above wre in Ibe
ocfrae rotc^ srokr &, kattari, or kattrukirake.
139. In the passive voice , s»S©*£, kammani, and in what fa
.called by Dr. Wilkin#, the substantive voice , (»:«*©, bhave, the
affix ofl is inserted between the root and the terminations of the
proper active form ; sometimes also the terminations of the
common active form may be used* with the insertion of thjp
same affix, in the formation ot the passive voice.
Examples of the formation of the passive voice .
©we&eoaso ®cCo£)o s>fc3;) S)£*«oo s©8 6©*8 d© 3, tenatayi
jnay&va sp odgno paccati paccatevd, by him or by thee or by me 9
that rice is cooki’j.*
£©#<5TC>, te paccante, they are cooking; C3©®$3, paccase,
thou art cooking; C© *>©*£> , paccavlje, ye are cooking: c5o®,
pacce, I am cooking ; ( being cooked>)& S)DW®£>, paccdmtye, w$
arc cooking , ( being cooked .)
Examples of the formation and use of the substantive voice
Intransitive verbft akammakatf , take this form;. as,
<p»w£De?oaD©0®tfo9? tenavata>a Yimay&vahhuyaJte^
there is being 9 by him by thee qv by tnc^ i. e> you are t> or etrebf^
coming .
, 140 ? V ( crbs f q 0©S5Cn;3© do, ikhyaiapaQcay a, ape of thi|eo
kinds ; 4R45X3D, kattp, wag®, kamipa, ^©^blidva.
««>©©«», sakammaka, and qp«^8®« Q}K f akammak|edh6to*
roots of active and neuter vefbs^ require, the former, qn qgcnt 9 opd
an object ; and the second only an agent : but when it p* not de-'
sired to express the object, the eco©, bhava, or substantive voice^
jp$y be used jyith an activp verb .
+ff
f fhe affix o9 if in the aboys iostancci changed igtoJ©*
Digitized by
Google
lot
PALI GRAMMAR,
Example of the bbfivakarake, so used ;
e©a«>, gelje devadattena paccate, there is cooking
in the house by Devatalta.
In some instances, neuter verbs, *f *»S® «d, akavnmaka, become
sakammaka, verbs active , by prefixing to them,, a pre -
ppsition, G«C3GC5X»o, upasaggo ; as. ^tStgo5
•e», tfipasena rfigo abhibhuyate, the ascetic subdues his ppssions.
In all active verbs, an object is to be* found, and by this
means, active verbs are distiuguished from others.
In neuter verbs on the contrary, the object is not to be found,
and by this means they are known to be neuters ; as, in tbe
words •tftts'Gm, sopacati, he cooks;— the verb £3©, pac-i, which
expressed cooking , must have some object to act upon ; as ,food.
But in the words GC33 caS*» f so bhavati, he is, no object is
to be discovered. 1
Active and neuter verbs are therefore known by putting the
question *£•, kiM, what * as to the question kixtanti;
the answer in the former instance would be food; and in tbe
latter no answer could be returned.
End of observations on the Qc vattamfina
vibhakti,
141* The next tense is termed, t:09, pancami ; its termiiia^
tjons are as follow.
parassapadaM.
Sidg. Plur.
h *8 tf&yn
2 . & a
3. © ©
oe^, attanopadax*
Sing.
1. a>»
2. eg
3. e
Plur.
c^esaoj.
«>Sy3D
The e©®, pancami, answers to the imperative moody and is
used in commanding, prayings and blessing. Example j—
ea'taae^., parassapadaM.
Singular.
]. C3©«a, patatu, let him cook.
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALI GRAMMAR.
10
t. to®, paca, or C0 ©;>Id, padtyi, cook thoit.
3* e€to®, paduni, let me cook .
Plural.
1. e©e$X5^ pacantu, /el lAem cooA.
2. e©<9, pacata, cook ye.
3s cs&d&j pac&tna, /el ms cook.*
attanopadaMr
Singular.'
1. »©«., p&cataM, /el Atm cooA.
2. eOeag, pacassu, coafc IAom.
3; e»©, pace, /el me cook-
Plural.
1. tt©e5X$*, pacantaM, /el lAem cooA.
2. C3©5>©^, pacavljo, cook ye.
3. e3©9®«»«, pacfcmase, /el ws cooA.
142. The terminations of the passive voice , em0©t£, kammani,
are the same as the last six; hut between the root and the ter*
minations is introduced the letter ce, which is afterward
changed into © ; a9.
Singular.
1 . tt©eo # , paccataM, let A/m, Aer, or it le cooked , S?c. S?c. Src.
' The terminations of the ^pt5X3&a>e^O^% attanopadaM, (proper
form y ) are likewise applied to verbs in the substantive voice ;
( 0090 , bh£va 9 ) the affix od being introduced between the root
and those terminations ; as, '
7 Singular.
1. tgoflO)*, bhuyataM, let there be being by him y Src.
The above rules, for applying the terminations of verbs in the
passive , (*»£©, kamma,) and substantive (0030, bh&va,) voice ,
will like wise be found taanswer all the other tenses.
«»»#
* In the~second person singular ef is substituted for the termination
£, and that when that termination is used, the vowel preceding it is
made long. It is likewise made long before the termination^ of the
third person Singular and plural.
Digitized by
Google
104 *ALI GflAMWA*.
143. The tttof/totfauof, is used in varrouir acceptttiorib, in
many of which it answers to our Potential mood, hmy, might,
could , awn/rf, should^ Ire. adcordihg to the context. The only
acceptations, however, stated in the JBd/dmidro, are <P*2®*&*
anumati, consent or permission, answering to may, might. If c.
otfweeo'', parikappo, aisA or inc/maftonj anawerifi^ to
9 hould, ought , 4rc. .
The terminatibns of the btSO&®, sattami, are,
p&rassapadaai. cpewsac^ttb^** attanopaddu.
Sing. Plur. Sing. Pldr;
1. doe* h tfd
2. 3 os*} <9 tfofliKcS 2. b<s><9o doe*e
Si deettf' doto® 3. doS** daC*>e©»
The above termination^ are applied to roots of the ceqjtiga*
tion tg©o^ , bhuvddi, as in the folllowing example
t36tSC5% para*s6.
Singular.
1. be©, pace, or be©oe*, paceyya, he may cook •
2. /b®>©ae*3 A, paceyydsi, /Aon mayest cook .
8. be©* *)8, paceyydmi, / winy cooA.
Phiral
1. de©^% paceyuM, they may cook *
2. os©j<j»< 5, paceyjStha^on w*ay cooA.
3. paceyyama, zoo may took •
cfbjojibw, attano.
Singular.
1. CM»©d, pacetha, Ac may cook .
2. b©©*^* pacatho, /Afy iwey cooA.
5. be©4*», paceyyaM, / iwny cooA.
Plural. % o
1. b<s>©tf*, pfcctetdM, they fnay cctok .
2. be © ** e©to0, paceyyavl}6, you may cook*
3. tte©o$20®€)te, ptfceyjdinje, a?e may codk*
* Note. That to the first person singular, (hie termination 0 m#y «
substituted for OcOV, eyya.
I
Digitized by
Google
PALI QBAMMAB.
105
144. The a*o'9«£5 , », parokkh4, (answering to the second pre-
terit in Or. Wilkin’s Grammar,) is uied to express, time past ,
indefinitely, «$e©«3sD ^Sec«n»(»7, apaccakkha atitek&lo.
The terminations of this tense are as follow
tttfexa, parassa.
attano.
Sing-
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
ly
C
1. «d
®<3*
2. &
«9
2.
3.
SCO
3. «
« ®eo
In affixing the root to these terminations, its first letter, with
the inherent vowel, is doubled ; as,
' CcTcsp, parassa. i
Sing. Plur..
1. C3C3©, papnca. * papacu.
2. C3t5®0, papace. C3C©^x5, papacittha.
3- C3C0, papaca. ee0®CO, papacimlja.*
«fOW3®«30, attano.
Sing. Plur.
1. ee©«d, papacittha. fcjt 3 ©*tf, papacire.
2. ee©»«8b papacittho. cse?0*8W, papacivfjo.
S. ec30, papaci. to©£®€)t», papacimlje.
The term tt©S)9'*e«>aw> sabbadhdtuko, is applied to the ter-
mination* of the 0«X3)0J®«fl3, vattamano; e©fi, paflcaml ; M
W»®, sattami; and r»oa©W0«?, livattani ; bnt the terminations
of the es#<5o«fi'CS parokkhd, and all the other tenses, are termed
asabbadhatuko.
145. The eoaoJWew, Ijiyaftani, (answering to the first pre-
terit in Dr. Wilkin’s Grammar,) denotes lime past, before any
portion of the current day.
The following are the terminations of this tense.
• The augment $ is inserted in the second and third persons plu*
nl between the root and the termination.
o
106
PALI GRAMMAR*
estftJtt,
parassa.
^tsatovn,
attano.
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur*
1. q a
C>
1.
ej
2. S>
2. ©ea
©bo*
3. *
®e»3
3. f.
G&iota
In applying tbe above terminations, as also, tbe terminations
of the Hftjg'we?, ajjatani, and aROQieaowS, kalati patti, lenses,
the letter <f is sometimes prefixed to the root ; as,
parassa.
Sing. Plur.
1. 90©J, apaci. «ft*©, apacu.
2 . apaco. «pe;©od, apacattha.
3. 90 ©, apaca. <?»©€*£», apacamhi.
tfSS/SOW), attano.
Sing* Plur.
1. tft'Qtsd, apacattha, qpt3©«5», apacatthnif.
2 . tfta& •«, apacase. <fe©©t£>», apaca«l)aM.
3. <pt30*, apaciM, *pc?©0©C©»CS,apac£ml)a8e.
But the tf prefixed may be omitted; as, U©o, pac£, C3©,pacu,&c.
146. The <ft iStaeP, ajjatani, (answering to the third preterit in
Dr. Wilkin’s Grammar) is defined to be, the preterit of to-day,
and is used to denote, time recently and indefinitely passed. This
tense is much used in Pali, and from its frequent recurrence
it is denominated, a wave in the ocean of verbs
The terminations of this tense are
C3CC2C3, parasssa. q*3X35»en0, attano.
Sing,
I.t
Plur.
Sing.
Plur.
c-
1. <f3
G*»
2. S>
2. ota
©b>
3. |j*
®CSD0
3. *
C3(5taC3, parassa. '
Sing. Plu.
1. «yo8, apaci. cp-©*, apacuM, or ept3©.ej, apaciMiu.
2. ^53® ©d, apaco. cpe©aS. apacittha.
3. apaciM. «fCC®COO, apacimljd.
Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMAR.
107
cpotteeno, attano.
Sing. 1 Finn
1.. apaed. ' apac6.
2. <pq©»t3, apacise. «fO©8*fc*, apacivljaw.
3. <*C3©, apaca. <p«© ♦©££>, apaciral)e.*
147. The andgata, (answering to the second future
of Dr. Wilkin’s,) but not denominated as that is,/Ae future of
to-day, has the following terminations
1 * tttf ocs, parassa. attano.
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur*
1. rasea EC3<5*S ]. EttCSD C2C3©^»
2. taaQ tasd 2. oc3*ta easwSto
3. Ett:© EC33® 3. EC3 C3B0®®&>
In this tense the augment $ ($«M$ocsy*@o, ikdrdgamo,) is in-
, serted between the root and the terminations; as,
parassa.
Sing.^ # Plur.
1. E©EtoS, pacissati. E©E£3 oj6j, pacissanti.
2. C3©EC3fl, pacissasi. O0EC33, pacissatha.
3. E>©ECtt®, pacissdmL oSECtt?, pacissama.
9*SK3aoe*>0, attano.
Sing. Plur.
1. C3©EC3ceo, pacissate. C©EC5s>o3C», pacissante.
2. E©EC3WC3, pacissase. eSwtt*©^), pacasskvlje.
3* C3©EC3% pacissaM. c©Et50^®K), pacissdmlje.
149. The «nQ0&E*5£B, kaldtipatti, (answering to Qr- Wilkins
conditional mood,) denotes, that the act expressed by the verb
has not been accomplished \ owing to some impediment which has
occurred , or to the want of the assistance requisite for its completion*
It is seldom used singly, being commonly followed by another
word in the same tense, and in construction with the particles
03^©, sace, if and kadd, then , expressed or understood.
The termination of this tense are
parassa. attano.
Sing. Plur. Sing. ' Plur.
1. C£33 Ott.CJ 1. tS3d fcS.ig
•Tic rujment is in several of the above inflexions, inserted
between the root and the termination* " Digitized by CjOO^IC
108 _ VAhl tiHAHHAlL.
2 . #C3C3 OE© ?* ' C3tt#0‘*
?. C5C3* C3E©E>) 3. Ott* C3tt^«)^«>W
Ex. C3»©«>S^S* «5Dtf>a030* tt>S r J«>cr^ QWtt>0 cpw©
C3C3 , sacetabbirubbaM nabhaveyya tadupakaroNEM labheta
apaci&sd, if nothing had opposed it and if he had obtained provisi-
ons , he would have cooked .*
The augment qp may optionally be prefixed to the. root in
this tense; and the augment f is invariably inserted between
the root and the terminations ; as,
CotX3, parassa.
Sing Plur.
1. qeQaft?, apaciss6. ^C©C3C3*C3, apacissaMsu.
2. ^C3©5>C3C3, apacisse. «pE©i3E<9, apacissatha,
3. <fC5©iX3*, apacissaM. cf3©3ttSC£>), apacidsam^a.
, attano.
1. ^t*©^W<9, apacissatha. ^e©e*5.s?, apacisstMsu.
2. ep^Swaa^apacissase. ^C39rae3s>0'jD, apacissavle.
3 . ^’3©^., apacissaw, 9C3©C3M0fet)^Dtf>w, apacissain^a*
se.
i&9.A causal verb , w^S)e«do,l)etvattho 5 is a derivative, form*
ed upon its primitive by the introduction of the following affixes
between the root and the terminations of the eight tenses; viz.
•4^, Ne, Naya, N$pe, ^o-jcSO, Nipay&j that is, c5,
^oeo, with augmentation of the first syllable of the
root; as, sing. C30#>©8, p&ceti ; plur. OOa©e5^S^ pacenti, he
cooks , they root, Sec.
By means of the causal affixes, neuter verbs, ($*»©©«£ 3o«a,
akammakadbdtii,) to which they are joined, become verbs active ,
«&j©S>«Ojq), kammakadhatu ; as,’ tfcesffl <5ocfc??g •'csxa.
ta^0or, bhikkhu r§gddidusak?iM maggaMbhaveti, Me priert
contemplates thp defiling path of the passions .
End of the hhuvadigaNo, or observations on
the class of verbs of whiefi tg is the first.
* The first and second verbs, iu (he tybove example, are in the
tatSX3i®> Batumi, or Potential uiood.
Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMAR*
|09
150. The class of verbs called <5 l£)o^, rudh&di, from having
at their head, differ only from the class termed tg©0?|
bhuvadi, in requiring, »JC535) \3oa*, niggaljltaM, the mark*, to
be inserted after the first s\ liable of the root ; as,
1. sing. <5».^S)S, rundhati; plur. rundhanti, Ac*
151. The class of verbs called ^ * o£, divadi, from having ^ 0,
at their head, insert go between the root and the termination;
which oo is, on the instance of the root ^0, changed into © aa
well as the filial consonant of the root itself, making in the pro*
sent tense, sing. ^£>3?, dil)hati,Ar/?/ays, plur. <;'£) dibbanti.
The substantive and the passive voice, in this conjugation*
differ only from the active, in affixing to the root the tormina*
tions of the proper forip.
152. The class of roots called sirv&di, from having CJ
at their head, insert the affixes NuNa, that is with
augmentation, and between the root and the terminations;
»s,
1. sing, suNoti, he hears/ plur- suNauti.
or snNati ; S3 suNanti,
rj 7 7
III the passive voice , the final vowel of the root is lengthened
before the affix cfl ; as, sing. C3a3®«>, suyate, he is heard ; plur ,
suyante.
153* The class of roots called «Sc30^ kiyidi, from having 3
at their head, insert between the root and the terminations
in the active voice; as, sing. kiwati, he sells ; plur ,
so.^&sSi, kiNanti.
Here it will be observed that the final vowel of the root is
made short before the terminations.
154. The class of verbs called gnljadi, from having onto
at their head, insert oo, or 4rtm between the root and the
terminations ; the root being, hoyrever, changed into before
Digitized by
Google
no
PALI GRAMMAR#
the first of the above mentioned affixes; as, sing . $«Je»S,ghep-
piati, he takes ; plur. gaNlj&ti, also gaNljati.
In the passive voice .
1. sing. csrcaoaca, g'ayljate, or <£>c££>S, gayyljati, plur - cfccaeo
esasS, gayyljanti, are taken ; the c3 denoting the passive, being
here' inserted before instead of after the last letter of the Toot.
155. The class of verbs called tanadi, from having
at their head, insert S) and <§<5, between the root and
the terminations ; as, from a root of this class, is formed;
L sing . karoti, he does; plur. karonti,
or Scfcr, kayirati, »<2<5c5*3, kayranti.
Sometimes the affix ® is changed into £ ; which again is
changed into 8 ; and after the latter, is changed into €© ; © is
substituted for SB; as, sg© kubbanti, they do ; but iu the
proper form, the present makes, sing , kurute, plur.
•*£©<? kubbante.
In forming the passive voice, the augment $ or d 5 , is insert-
ed between the root and the passive affix <£$ as, sing*
kariyate, it is done ; plur- kariyante; or suppressing
the 6 of the root kayyate, sing •
In the qptdS'coeij, ajjjatani,^wsf,- the root tao'may be changed
into ssiOtty before the terminations; as, sing . akasi, in-
stead of^ssN?* akari ; plur . akasuM, instead of tytadu,
akaruM ; ka^a^nay also be substituted for the root ewef,
i^th e future tense;, as, sing. ka^ati, instead , of
CXiS, karissati.
J56. The class of verbs called ^cTO^, curidi, from having ©37
at their head, insert and ^od, that is d) and os with aug-
mentation of the root, between it and the terminations ; as, <s>Ql
f>ocr, coreti, or ^©ocTcdS, corayati, he steals .
// volilive 9 ( f icchatthoj derivative is formed upon
its primitive by doubling and modifying the rooty and introduc-
ing ® f or ts between it and the termination. Thus from the
root tgd*, bhuja, to eat , is formed, the volilive ©sges©, bubhuk-
Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMA*.
1U
kha, to wish to eat ; tbe initial consonant being doubled, accord*
ing to the rule laid down by Dr. Wilkins, Sans* Grant, page,
129; and the final of the root being changed into an before the ,
volitive affix ©; as, sing. G)tg*tt55,plur. From escs
ghasa, to eat> is formed, the voUtive, tf acts', jaghacha,; the
initial consonant being doubled according to the same rule;
this root afterwards becomes jighaccha, by the insertion
of the augment $ after the first letter, and by changing the
final ofthe primitive into ©*, as, eJwQci <£, jighacchati, he desires
to eat • From l)ara, to lake, is formed the volitive ,
jigiMsa ; the initial consonant being doubled and the augment
introduced as above ; the wor^d c£», giM, having been pre-
viously substituted for the primitive root, and the volitive
affix C3 added ; as, 3§ jigiMsati, he wishes to take Spc.
The causal verb is formed regularly from the roots thus modi*
fied.
The term nominal ie applicable to such verbs as have for
their root a theme, or noun From the noun cs£)cd, pabbata,
it mountain , for instance, may be formed, with the affix 90 od, aya,
pabbatayati, he resembles a mountain; that is, in firm -
ness ; pScsDDodS babbatayati yogi, the ascetic imitates
a mountain .
A nominal verb is derived from putto, a son , by the
addition of the affix & rf, iya ; as, otaojaoe* fi££%qgdx, puttiyati
sissaMguru, the teacher treats his pnpil as a son . Also, from
C3® *5*3)0, patto, by the addition of the same affix ; as,
t035©, puttiyati bhikkhu, the priest longs far a bowl (of food.) .
Nominal verbs are also formed by means of the affix 4&ca y
Naya, that is 90 S with augmentation; as, ©C3©csS <5«*S, vi-
suddhayati ratti, the night becomes clear /
dVtljayati vinayaiamuni, the priest strengthens his obedience ;
coS, atibattiyati, he gets over by means of an elephant *
(here qpS, ati, means dver or across .)
Digitized by
Google
119
PAM GRAMMAR.
A Ferb,tf kkkhydto, is defined to be that which ha#
three times or tenses , <3ttQO©t3X3JO, kal&tto past, qpoJeo, atha;
future , qpexncaw, anagata $ present , ©*5X5i©0#eoo vattam&no:—
three persons, tiptiriso;-^r$/, pa^havno; iwiVf-
dlt , ^t5St>*©3, majjliimo; principal, ^>0X35^©% uttamo which
points out an action , $§cdo©o©, kriyavaci:— wAtcA A«$ Mrec voices^
tikdrako; the active neuter , «»OX3, kattu; the passive,
kamma ; Mtf substantive 9 too©, bhdva z— which has not three
genders , attaliggo, viz, the feminine , f itthi.
Me masculine , 2**^ pun; anc * l^ e wea/er,«^*w«5, napiiMsaka:—
j£?A/cA has two numbers , ^©©»*>,divacanaM, viz. Me singular , ©
»©©«*>•, ekavacanaM, and Me pMra/,®U ©©**>, bal)trvacanaM*
End of chapter eight , 0/1 Me conjugation of verbs or qpo©2S)aj f
ikhytta. '
CHAPTER IX.
, >
ON THE FORMATION OF PARTICIPLES AND PARTI^IPJAI*
NOUNS.
Participles, «Se»fc®0, kitako, m e formed by means of different
affixes from to ofl inclusive, ajid are of three times,
*ew/, awc ? future , and of Mree gtndcrs .
Such participles as are formed from roots ending in $ and ^
also from the class of rerta called © cf <f, varadi. and by means
of the affixes qp and the second and f are of the masculine
gender.
Such participles as are formed by the affixes og by affixes of
the substantive voice, CfcO©a»£>, bliavakiccaM, and by the affix
An, are of the neuter gender*
But the parlkiph s from lave, to f55®T5XN*, ikhattuM >
inclusive, are indeclinable, and have no gender.
The following is an instance of the use; of the affix 4*, i. e,
qp with augmentation.
Digitized by
Google
PAM GRAMMAR,
113
Masculine .
puflnakdro pumd, a doer of good actions .
punnakdri itti, Do.
^C*j punnakdraM kulaw, a family performing
good actions .
The affixes ^Sgeg, Navutu, and qpoS, dvi, are used in form*
ing participles ; as, instead of tanikarotiti, is writ-
ten *o«>s»®<5o, takkaro, a thief:— Also dfpaMkaro,
the light producer , the name of a Buddho .
The final d* of the root nf, to arrive* being changed into
©, and that © into epod, ay a, takes the preposition 8 before it,
and forms ©WacOO, vinayo, obedient; the meaning of the origi-
nal root being changed by means of the preposition .
The final of the root qg, bhu, to be , being changed into
©, and that © into ep©, ava, forms t£0®So, bhavp ; the first
syllable of the root being augmented, and the affix y sub-
’ ^ined.
ttr, he affix qp being subjoined to the root ©o% vara, to which
-“position t3«, saM, is prefixed, forms the compound term
'‘/a.
, saMvaro.
N 1
ime affix may be used with the whole class of verbs ,
(50^, varddi, viz. ©cr, vara t tohinder> or restrain; t3tf, '
io go; to eat ; $($, dara, to disregard; ©o', cara, to go ;
U; cfc®, gamu, to go; tz go. sappa, to go; oc§^, yamu, to im m
,,ede^ hinder; toejo, sana > to sound; £ 5 Der>, bana, to injure , to
kill; lo go or move; e*>^, naila, to sound inarticularly , as the sea 9
#c. mada, to intoxicate , madden; rawa, to sound\
<*>^5 g a !) a > to take , receive ; tfc^japa, or tfco. jappa, to arti - -
culate, to speak .
After roots ending in ep or qp\ the nfljx qp is changed into
cpooc, aya, and another affix epan, aka, added ; as, from e,, dd,
lo give , ddyaka, he who gives; the affix qp*», aka, being
substituted for Navu, and another affix, qpe5D, ana, may
also be added to the same root instead of the affix c3.
p
Digitized by LjOOQ le
114
FA.M GRAMMAR.
The d 5 of the root «S! being; changed into d, and that d into
&\a, the word woofit®, nay aka, is formed by the addition
of the affix ^«d, aka.
. The £ of the root eg being changed into ©, and that S) into
* 00 , 4v a, the word G& 0 ©«>, savuka, is formed by the addition
of (he same affix.
n&> aka, signifies he w ho leads or conducts ;
s&vaka, he who hears .
The affix subjoined to the root wef, kara, and some other
roots, form participial nouns ; the c T of kara, being previ-
ously changed into as, kattu, a maker , in the nomi-
native singular tstSOO, katt£; so also tS€d', satthi, from
CO-od, satthu, one of the names of Buddho.
t The 9 of c di>a, to see, being changed into *, and the affix;
*oO, avi, added, the word ^C0C3?O, das$ 6 u, he who sees, is form-
ed, the final ts of the root being doubled before the affix ; the,
word ^eacr.O, dassau, is then declined like $©, daN@(
The affix Na. that is * with augmentation, being applir
tq the root < 3 % tf, ruja, to pain , and the final changed into
the word ©doer, roga, that which pains , viz disease, is for
The same affix applied to the root r©, paca, form^
p&ka, that which cooks or is cooking , ( of itself;) the final ©
changed into «» before the affix ; this forms Cftw?, piki, in
plural.
To the roots <*©, gamu, and sappa, the affix *r©, kvf,
is applied ; after which both that affix and the § of c*©. gamu,
are suppressed ; butjn the instance of tccc, sappa, the two last
letters are changed into ©.
The affix * is suppressed, in forming the word *ootg, abhi-
bjifi, he who sublets .
The affix Nya, being added to the root ©<?, cara, the.
word ©^r&ri, i* formed ; as, braljmac^rf, he tcho
conduct $ hima If like a Brahma*
The a ffix yu, being added to the roots tC<£> sadda, fa.,
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALI GRAMMA*.
1155
j found; sgQ, kudha, to be angry ; ©<3, cala, to move ; ©<J, manda,
to decorate , 9<5d, attha, to mean; <K©, ruca, to shine ,
itouns ending in ana, are formed from these roots, or
from the substitutes; as, ettnts&en), ghosano, sound or voice)
from ghusa, substituted for C3<£, sadda; so likewise
©Qa&sw?, vaSShano, increase , from ©Se&, vaSSha.
The affix dL, rfi, is affixed to the root c*©, gamu, to go 9
When preceded by the preposition 9 CO 3*, p£ra, across, or ovcr 9
and forms C33<5a£, pa rag u, owe who has gone over ; the § of the
root and the <S of the affix being first changed into m and that
letter suppressed in the formation of this compound.
The same affix being affixed to the root bikkha, to
Jfegy the word csysSS^ bhikkbu, a mendicant , is formed ; the cf of
the affix being suppressed and its final vowel made short.
The root na* to know , takes the saute Affix, when pre- N
ceded by the S; as, 8)«^sgs^l, vinnu, a well informed person ;
flte <f of the affix being suppressed, and the final £,*3 retained ;
and the radical consonant preceding the affix being doubled.
Thie affixes «©, labba, and ef^Si j? 9 anfya, are added to verbs
substantive and passive , (8330, bhava, and a»S®, kamma,) the
augment f being inserted between the root and the affix ; as,
*£>&«*£)•, bhavilabbdM, oh toQ^oc*, bhavaniyaM, that which
dught to be ; so also* katabbo, and kara-
niyo, that which ought to be done, are formed from the root
kara ; the 6 being changed into o in the first compound.
The affix *r£), tabba, is al*o affixed to the root <*«, disa,
in the following manner ; — the cn of the affix is changed into
drt, raj)£ha; the f of disa, is suppressed, as well as the
6 of <54$, rappha, and the compound <£eSS>, da|>J)habbaM f that
which ought to be known 9 is formed.
The affixes 4**, Nya, and coo as, tayya, are added to verbs
substantive, and passive ; as, from the root kara, is formed
with augmentation of the first syllable of the root, and by the
f
Digitized by
Google
i
116
PALI GRAMMAR.
insertion of the augment § between the modified root and the
affix «bd5o 3., kartj aw, that which should be done ,
Tq the root na, the affix tya, being subjoined, the
te/m (555*:e» jO**, natayyaM, is formed, signifying, that which
should be, or ought to be known •
To the roots vada, to or tell ; ©$, mada, to he intoxi-
cated ; c gania, to go ; ceeT, yuja, to join; cccTCP, gara^a, to
despise or scoff at, and other roots ending in Of, the following
affixes are subjoined;— g®, miua, cac®, gga, ytja,
tJcfl*, eyya, caotf, g4ra, Nya.
The first affix requires that the last letter of the root to.
which it is subjoined should be suppressed; as, vaj-
JaM, a word , or speech^ or speaking , from ©S> vada, that which is
uttered \ m
The affix c£0 y£a, being subjoined to the word caotf, g£ra,
substituted for garal a, (he term garayl)aM, is
formed, signifying, that which is to be despised) or that which is
contemptible.
The affix cScfl*, eyya, subjoined to the root t-'O, p4, forms
peyyaM, that which is jit to drink or ought to be drank ;
the final vowel at the root being suppressed before the affix.
The affix <?£), ricca, is subjoined to the root kara, and
forms kiccaM, the final letter of the root and the initial
consonant of the affix being suppressed; £©s 9 kiccaM, signifies,
that which is done or ought to be done .
The affix ofl, ) u, which is afterwards changed into ana,
and that word into aNa, forms, when added to the root
gal)a, the term galjanaM, a taking , or receiving;
it is also added to the root na ; as, n&naw, know -
ledge .
The affix cfl, yu, is also used in forming compound terms,
the first member of which is either in the nominative ,
katigu, instrumental, or sfrcfd#), kara n a, locative y adha*
ra ; case ; as, instead of rajaMl)araii| that which rc*
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PAM GRAMMAB*
I1T
moves dirty (by washing \) is written rajol}araNaii 9
Water; the • of rajaM, being changed into
Instead of yenapal)&rantitaii, that by
which any thing is struck , is written pal)araNau.
Instead of <ae3®*?oeo<3>x5®*. yasmiM&santitaM, that wherein
persons sit, is written qp*eo«ft*, asanaM, a scat.
By the power of the letter ©, the affix cfl, yu, may also be
subjoined to compounds, the first member of which is either in
the sampradana, dative, or apadina, ablative
case; as, instead of cOC^CoSSoc^gO©®)®*, yassasammapadiya-
tetaM, that which is given to any one with good will , is written
sampadanaM, a gift .
Instead of yasma apeti apadadati-
taM, that which goes from a person , or is removed from him , it
written apadanaM.
To the roots c,, dd, to give, and £>>, dhS, to bear , the
the affix $ being subjoined, and the preposition, epo, and
prefixed, the words epo?, adi, the beginning, and udadhi,
the ocean , are formed; iustead of <p'3<Ja sSS, &diyatfli, that
which is first; and udakaMdadatiti ; the of
dakaM, water , and the ^ of dadh&, being suppressed.
The affixes qp, 09, and cO, are used in the formation of
nouns of the feminine gender ; as, instead of jiratiti,
that which becomes old or decays , is written cf< 5 o, jara, age ; the
affix qp being suppressed, and <9 3 substituted in its stead.
The affix & being subjoined to the root ©eft, mana, to know,
or understand , and the final letter of that root being suppressed,
the word ®ec, mati, sense or understanding is formed.
The affix co, yu, which afterwards becomes qpeft, ana, being
subjoined to the root ©S, citi, to think , the word 6>0coeft?,
cetan&, thought , is formed; the first vowel of the root being
euguiented.
The root »tf, kara? being subjoined to the word #C? 9 1st,
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
->At,I GBAMttAS,
'I#8
mud the first letter of that root doubted the Word
KakkaraM, effort , is formed ; the same root being gubjoinfcd hi
i>'ke manner to the preposition, a, su, and g, du,tlfe words tto»
c*, sukaraM, easy; g«3)3>cf # , dukkaraM, difficult , are formed,
'fke affix d, tha, being subjoined to the root ttS>, same, and
the final £ changed into the word C3®ed), samatho, wnavtir
nitty ) is formed.
The affix @, being subjoined to the root to, bhl, to fiat,
the word to#®?, bliimo, a coward , is formed
The root $j J C3, disa, to see, or look , modified by the afibc
*9, kvi, is used as a*n attributive of likeness or resem-
biance when put after pronouns, pronominals, &c* in therr
crude form, and may generally be interpreted by the English
'word tike .
(9 is substituted for t®> ima, this; or, is substituted
£»r as, what, or which , (relative,) coo for eo, that; ©o for
ain^a, /; «6 for «*•, kiw, what? $ for C5 «p, eta, that ;
tj or C30 for samana, ///:e ; as, C? ' (disO, ftAre f&tf *
yadiso, like what; to 5* tiadiso, like that;
mtso, midiso, tike me; «JgVt30, kidisO, tike what ? (5<J®C30, edi-
g like that ; C3^#o:, sadiso, or M?<f*C30, sad iso, same.
Instead of £C3,disa, *$£), kkha, may be subjoined to the same
pronouns, to form words of likeness; as* idikkho,
&c. The last letter of the root gC3, disa, being changed intfc
ciD, kkha.
Another way of forming words of the same description
by suppressing the faial of (he rootles, disa ; as, d 1 ^, idi,
The affixes co, tavantu, and t4\i, bein£
subjoined to the root lju, to he , form participles of the past
tcrtss; *f, l)uto, m. l)utur6, m. j>tit£vii«i.
ane who has been; the vantu, of tavaotif,
i^mg as usual changed into Co in the nominative .
riie same affixes may beadded to the root tgtf, bhuja, to eat,
but the final of the root must be suppressed, and the first letter
Digitized by
3y Google
Till Gf.AH*\X« m
of the affixes doubled ; as, sgeOJCO, hhtitfo, fgtas^.fchuihrya,
*§t3X3}0Q, bhuttavi. one who bits eaten.
The affix ep., being subjoined to the root C#w, Jana* t» be
Ion ; the word e<»>e93, j4‘o, one born , is formed ; the b»<<t. letter
of the root being suppressed, and the iuherent vowel of.tbe first
lengthened.
The affix 85 , being changed into tJD is added to the root
rub a, when preceded by the preposition, <*\ and forms
irul|fO, one who ascends ; the. last letter of the root,
being changed into <3.
The affix *e, being subjoined to the root ge, to sound,.
form* q gftaM, a tong,- the root being changed into <*.
The affix 89, being subjoined to the root *»*, kara, di-
vested- of its final ; tbeparticiple, «»♦, katasij done, is formed.
The affix to, being subjoined to the root tmtS, kara, modi-
fied as al*ove ; the first radide letter being doubled, the affix
changed into €>, and the preposition prefixed toi the. root, tbo
word gesenQ*, dukkaJmM, ***» is ^ or,ne ^‘
The affix 8), being subjoined to the root ©£)•, badha,
to fasten, or tie ; the participle, ®*S», lmddho, bound, is termed ;
the last letter of the root being changed into r 1t and the affix
into £>
lh like mnngfier the affix ao, subjetued te the root <;«), U-
bha, to obtain; the word <?6>, laddliau, i« formed; the- last let-
ter of the root being changed into ^ and the. affix 8», iuto
Q.
The, affix 85 , being changed into tBiis added to the root
£ 0 ®, vaSSha, and forms £«© 3 , vuco, an aged tuan. The
double consonant of the root being changed into €), and ti e
0 into Q.
The affix, 8J, being subjoined to the root ds» r n,
to burn, the word <€»., datSShaM, burnt, is formed ; the la-t
root being changed into ©> and. the affix into £B-
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
ISO
PALI GRAMMAR.
The affix », being subjoined to the root dusa, to'
hate ; the participle , duffrtio, is formed ; the last letter'
of the root and the affix being together changed intoed.
The affix e», being subjoined to the root tSg, bhida ; the
participle , tBs>vxni, bhinno, is formed; the last letter of the
root being suppressed, and the affix changed into
The affix e», being subjoined to the root ©£), budha, to
understand; the participle Q#©?, I) u (Id ho, wise, is formed; the
final letter of the root being changed into g, and the affix intoQ.
The affix e», la, being subjoined to the root tara, to
cross over; the participle, tinno, crossed, is formed; the
last letter of the root being suppressed, and the affix changed
into
157. The following are participles of the present tense .
The affix ®o«, mana, being subjoined to the root tJ&>, sa-
Ija, to suffer ; the active participle, sal)amano, suf-
fering, is formed.
The same affix being subjoined to the same root, with the
addition of the letter cfl ; the passive participle,
say^amano, being suffering, is formed ; the letter c3 being made
to precede the final letter of the root*
The same affix is likewise subjoined to the root eg, bhu, with
the addition of the letter ca, and forms a participle of the substan-
tive voice ; as, bhuyamanaM*
The § of c R>§}, gamu, to go, being changed into 0C5, the par-
ticiple, cfcQcS’*, gacchaM, going , is formed.
The following affixes are used in forming participles of
the future tense and other participles denoting, an act com-
menced but not yet finished:— qpoeft, these
subjoined to the root kara, fonh respectively
karissaM, karonto, -ago'cSasetfO* kurum&no*
karano.
The affix k£ra, is added successively to all the letters
Digitized by
Google
PALI 6&AmmAii.
1
of the alphabet, to express their sounds ; as, cpsaod', akAra, ca
feak&ra, d*®0<5, rakara, &c. &c. This Affix so used is
denominated t£)?d@, svarta.
The affix f , being subjoined to the root C£^, gamu, divest*
ed of its final vowel ; the participle ex®, garni, is formed.
The affixes u6»£),fave, and *£•, tufa,- are sdhjoined to terta !
followed by others expressing wish or, desire, and where there
is but One agertt for the acts, denoted #7)y each of those Verbs;
aS, katave icchati* or §©#c&y tt&tuw
icchati, he desires to do; the word con, k£ y being Substituted for
*5*6) Kara*
The affix eg*, tuM. being subjoined to the root ?jC3, disa, to
see, the last letter of the foot, together with the affix, ate
changed info cr€g, rapphu ; after which the f of £ , and the cf
of the substituted affix being suppressed, the word daf*.
phuM, to see, is formed.
The affix eg., Ium, is subjoined to Verbs preceding others Se*
hoting worthiness , or fitness; a?, rtirfdttumd
rap at i, he is fit fur abating or to abuse .
The affixes tuna, ©ben, tvAna, and ©o, tvfi, are used
in the formation, of what Dr. Wilkin’s terms, indecHUablc pre -
ter participle*, and what in Pali Are denominated, a©^ccfoi
pAbbakrijA, from their always being fallowed by p»tne othei*
verb; they are also called samAnakaftA, fioirt
requiring but one agent, though the acis they express be nu-
merous ; as, k&tund, or ^»©Den^katfvAna\ or ta©o
katva, gacchati, having done he goes ; <§©0, phitvA,
3© o, pltvA, ©cf en, vajati, having stood and drank , he goes f
from the roots 8)0, phA, and C3, pa; c3&> o CfccC* GcxotfJ'tS,
dfpaM 1 disva bliayarf lippajjati, having setri a Hon , frctr is pro-
duced, or fear is occasioned bi/ (he sight of a lidrf. Thfrfs an ex-
Q
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
128
PAM GRAMMAR*
ample of the bhinnakattru, so called From the
agent not being expressed. From the root t3$, sada, to make or
form> 6?c. the particle C3'5t06?S)o,8ajjetv4, is derived, by adding
os to the root, then changing that letter together with (he final
letter of the root into c5* which is afterwards doubled, and ad*
ding the affix ®3, after inserting the augment f between it
and the modified root From the root €)£), budha, to under -
stand) the participle ©d!®SE)?> bujjbitvi, is formed by chang-
ing the final letter of the root into^SS), to which tf is after-
wards prefixed, and adding the affix SE):*, after inserting the
augment f between it and the modified root.
Sometimes the affix c0 is used instead of ©3; as,
' narHPeO?, kariya kattuno,
the augment f being lengthened before this affix. From the
root <;C3, disa, to speak , is formed the participle ^^C3,uddisa,*
by prefixing the preposition G doubling the first letter of the
root and suppressing the affix c0. From the root gal} a,
preceded by $££&•, dnil}aM, is formed the participle
dathaMgfL aM, by lengthening the vowel of the first letter
of the root, and changing the affix into*; os, ^<gK) # cco££>
daf[ 8M gaNl)&ti, he seizes him holding fast.
The affix kkhattuM, is used in forming ordinals; as,
jnstend of C5«»C:®.Q ©cT. ekasmiMvare, is written
tw., ekakkhattuM, once. So dikkbattuM, twice ;
etffitaxv* tikkhatthuM, thrice ; tiNikkhattuM,
thrice , fa. fa.
End of the £ €»»«©•, kitaka kantSaM,
* The affix t£9 i* suHstil.ited for ©9 after the root 5*6?, dist,
and the final of the root is »uppre*&e<’«
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALI GRAMMAR.
126
Jd
CHAPTER X.
»<Lt*
SYNTAX*
Nouns — On the use of the cases of nouns in construction .
This chapter treats of the manner in which the ca$e3 of
nouns are used, and when they may be expressed, and when
understood.
When nouns are ined in the formation of compound terms C3
©0^K0,samaso; derivative^ ords. tad'^do: when used
with verbs, qpo© .$;»•, a^nataM, or participles, ewtsj'seRO, kitako,
they are called uitaiu, expressed; otherwise they are
denominated auuttaM, understood .
'Vhen th^y t^nd and the other cases as well as the sixth, are
**ed, Jk. jrst may either be expressed or understood
not expressed, the first may be written or
"sntence rnay require.
: «»3<5e», karaka, is so called, from its being; used in
i the means by wluch an act is performed , $$c.
rds are divided into two classes, *©&), mukkhyo,
— qp® •>©£), amukhyo, * not principal ; — secondary , as,
j< 3. i?ag^4yaM na^anaM, washing in the river ;
C3t3Ws gaggayaM sassaiu, the crop near the river.
The following is an example of the gox3>s®§@*, uttakammaM,
or second case, expressed, in the formation of a compound term,
t3®0^0, tsamaso; agatasamano, the place to
which Buddho has come y viz. S vil^iro, a temple , (or
rather morastry adjoining to the temple .)
Example of the uttakammaM, with a derivative
Digitized by
Google
m
P^XI GUAMMAn.
Word «>©**»:), taddhito; «60 s3##d:), ghfitiko, that which is mixed
up with clarified butter, viz. <m>3f><5o, dljaro, food ~w\t\\ a
verb, epoSD}$©D # j akhyataM, ei3«>^«*3 ©<$>$•> sod e£)**o, sudena
odano paccate, rice is cooked by the cook .
With a participle ^f»fc»0 $ kitako,©s>©«^«>^fi(5>mo Q*®®',
buddhena deVito dhammo, a religious discourse preached by
Buddho . t t bi
In the first two examples, Abe second case does not ap-
pear, haying been suppressed by the rules for the formation of
compound and derivative words ; and in the third and fourth,
the second case is changed into the first, by a rule which re-
quires that when the agent is in the third, the object should be
in the first case.
Amongst many objects, governed by the verbs g&O?, du!?£di,
to milk , #c. ai^/®?,njSilii to convey, ^c- the principal object
5®®*, pad&nakammaM, isdrnomi^edQox>»«o®®%utta«
kammaM, or the case expressed; as, ®caoc3o ©ca S3*£c£0
6®p®o, gopalena gokhiraM du)l)ate duddhava, milk is ^
drawn from the cow by the Herdsman . Q f ^ \
In this example Stf*, kliiraM, is the principal oB^ g> ^ nd
the CpCDcDo^e^D, appadhino, or secondary object pvit i J
nominative case, by the rule mentioned in the precedin'^'
The following verbs are called ©«v§©*»«*>o, dvill
from their governing occasionally two objects; viz. £ *_*r v
oflO©,y6ca, cTlS, t rudbi, t Stf, puccha, bhikkha^-
sdau, £©D£®>o3D, yacadayo : — -a?, ni, £££>, vaJja,
radayo; as, t£>D*cro dasena
bharo gama^niyyate nltove, the load is carried to the village by
the servant .
In this example TOstfO, bharo, the principal object* s^nd
tfcOSU, ganmM, the secondary. ^
Verbs of motion; of knowing or understanding; of eating ; of
sounding , the verbs r, £ara, and e»cr, kara, and neuter
verbs, <j«5®® 5>e»o, akammako, when used with causal affixes
Digitized by
Google
?*u oha^vab.
m
hav* their objects expressed Cttmn ? * 9 # PJ 2 $«ia ^*e ?3 t»9® »
«£c5>d?aj*® *>0tto6®eoo£)o, stlmind daso giipan gaeehfipiyate
gacchipitovi, the servant is sent by (bis) master to the village.
In this example era, is the ^,9XS sja0©»» utta kammatf, «$
being the object most immediately connected with the verb*
Whep the same verbs are not used with causal affixes, their
objects are used to be amitta ; as, «W®e sftl&f
«n, diUo g&.mavgaccliati, the servant goes tq the tillage,
In this example gam a a, is said to be the
«»§©•, anuttakanupaH. because the verb bos no relation to it, or
influence over it:— tpcdejaJiSj fyetti sayeti, the elephant lies
doxfn. In this exany^le the word acts?, l)atti, is the
uttakattd, apd the verb being neuter there k no object ftitjmr
C®«WS^ utto, or anutto ; but wb«P the causal
is affixed to the same verb ; a*, t xts&iqa'&iszen
®e» tScaaQao);©', b»ttharol)ene |>attlii say^plyate *a\spitov4
the elephant driver causes, the. elephant la lie d 09 . 1 t, t be beat word
is termed cfr^OijqirxpsJSW; anuttaketta, the second, though ML the
nominative by the rule before mentioned, ia called
uttakainmaM.
When the agent is <f egotscM* anutto, it must be in the third
case, and when the object is ^,*twsr,utto, it roust be in the first }
as., as©ee>» tgefotn ngowo^So, bialjma-
Nene odano pmcitva bpnjate bhutlova, the boiled rice having been
copked by the Brahma is eaten (by hint.)
In this example the first word is said to be <?«£»»» »es©if
ai)uttakatt&; and the second £0X3; «>©&•, uttakainmaM,
bhunjate, is termed the principal act UcDowo goa?, padhana
kniya, end cv®$5^, ttgcitvfi, the seoandary a©*, CpcsQatso^att,
appadhtna $iy4v.a;— e>«B.S£>a «£•&€£>» ®«p«§S>€i© musvtf'
«^p(?KtSaweJW» bfcU»fcitvft ki«itv4 anaathavi bbojana
hriyan kfttwM sak,kati, thp act of entifig ean.be pr.npmvit.deit her
% begging (foocf), or- by emh«sing (it) or in some other manner*
.Here the adyeibiaj participles %re. termed *a£>)*p, appa«
\
I
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALI GRAMMAR*
186
dh&na, and the verb which terminate the sentence
c CD, padh&nakriya.
Any ©swe3#«n,visesano, whether &C 5, jati, kind; cg^, ?«-
*a, quality ; 4g*J0, kriyd, act; dabba, substance ; na-
tnaM, name, may be connected with a 0et3*EE>Oi visosso; as,
<x>c£X»o8eso**$ ®^0<;c5X5i®« 0, godhavalo ganti
vnanl devadattako, a white cow going with horns hi/ name De -
vadatta s>t£0 having three meanings, viz. o cow, the earth , and
g word or speech ; the ©•OWoeri"*, visesano, is used to specify
and distinguish the sense in which it is to be understood.
Worts agreeing in gender, number and case, with the SeCS
$C2£93, visesso, are termed tullyadhikaraNo;
•the words oes^es^* £>en*, ranniM dhanaM, though terminating
\in the same manner, are not tully&dhikaraNo,
but signify the wealth of kings.
In the example ©*5X3m*5 cittiui visati ja-
jranti, a hundred thoughts arise , the first word is neuter, in the
nominative plural ; the second feminine, and in the nominative
singular; they are not therefore termed tul-
ly&dhikaraNO.
The following are examples of the anutta-
itammaM.
m #>c, tf©S, sudo odanaw pacati, the cook boils rice;
» ©#©J OS®* ®^3e»©3, buddho dhammaM desitavd, Buddho
preached religious discourses, the word e^3c»e)o y desitava, is
equivalent to stages©, desesi.
The cyenoxa auuttakstti, has been already spoken
of.
The following are examples of a verb fc> u owed by two nouns
in the second case;— c058*Orf!^^toSfi8o©MD»^
gop£lo gdviu kiraMdolyati duddh&v&ttyddi, the Herdsman draws
milk from the cow , or has drawn fyc. c,eW3 <££>?>• eftaaoi
eric daso bh&raM ganiaM nayati nitav&tty&di, the ser*
cant takes the had to the village or has taken } Sfc. e&0@c,C3* C£0®*
Digitized by
C^pglc
TALI GRAMMAR.
187
«5®oS«S, s&mid&saM gamsM gamayati, or C30®C,«e3«a 830©*®©
oflen, samidasena g&maMgamayati, the master semis the servant Us
the vi/lage; cgrfcQttej. OS®* sffloQ^ew, gurusissaM dhaiumaM
bodhayati, or cgcTcfletitter) 03®* o©dO=«w, gurusisaena
dbammaM bodhayati, the teacher instructs his pupil in religious
knowledge ••
Example of the use of the epwS®o)O0C2,akammakadb&tu;—
tA«3D*<yo®K)0 tjs<5Q‘ taocflS &)«$030©0, l)atthdrol)o Ijatthin
s&yati Ijatthinavd, the elephant driver makes the elephant He damn.
Examples of the G«X3>«W3X»0, uktakatta \—t3 O 0 '«c? eaM,
jitindriyo, one who has subdued his passions, viz. a muni, or
priest", yj828®s®3) dbhidha nimiko, one who is acquainted
with that part of the religion of Buddho, which i» termed tfto
0»2©3, abhidammo, viz. a priest; case, ©$«>• t5©S, sudo oda-
naM pacati, the cook cooks rice ; ^35 punnak&ro, a
span who performs good actions, a virtuous man.
When many katrus are used, one of them is termed §•©»,
raukhyo, or principal ; as, CJ »>e9) cge$«> ©$«5* e»e©m,
sudajef)])ho sudena odanaM p&ceti, the principal cook causes food
to be boiled or dressed by a cook,.
Here trf»tfo€b) sudaje|>J>ho, is the ^©U«00»% mukliya-
kattd, being that which is immediately connected with the verb,.
It is also called ^sstsm utto, and the second noun a«gao»
ttaOXV), anultakatta. <r©$£>0 ta^ed" *e9<« Ostjen ©$«n. CSO
e©?',amaccos6daje]>f>hena sudena odanaM p&ceti, or
pdcayati, the minister makes the principal cook cause food to be
dressed by a cook .
Here amacco, is the chief agent, and the two
cooks are the subordinate agents.
When an act is performed by the agent itself, the agent
|s termed, kammakatli ; as, Rofl^SS
trOS'scn, kusalo sayaiueva bhijjate, the barn breaks of itself,
that is when the stone and other materials of which it is com*
Digitized by LjOOQie
rAitf feteXihriAA/
posed dees/ tend fall doWti of theitaitelveA, ttrffeduf the interveft-
#f Arty other agent.
Further examples of the ^rsjtsensstsott, anuftakattA;—
to »^<03 b©*€»,‘ sudena odano pAccate, tice is dressed
bp the took', O©i«o UtfSSJ&sj* «»»., pumani pcrSHast kataM,
good actions are performed by the man.
Here sudena, and pumurrA, Ate (he
AntftlakattA.
Example# of many $ew*sarje»en83:>, anuffnkattA, subordi-
nate agents 6s^«3®?*W5 6©)s5«5»>«>, shda-
jepphena sudeno odano pac&piydte, the principal cook catties
Jbod to be cooked by a cook. t3^®ef#ed«o e3®^«*3
ei&jSoaetlit, aniaccena s(idajef>|)heiYa sddena odano*
paedpfyate, the minister makes the principal cook cause food to be
dreised by a cook.
When there are* two acts performed by the same Agent, the*
dne is termed KOiVfi'geej, padhAnn kriya, And the other ej^ea
Qi&S^aSO, appadhAnakriyA, and the agent fe put in the third’
case, as, tgSE)5ttc3*®«>, BftA$TOttnewa bhutvA
suppyate, the Brahman having eOtett Sleeps.
Here tge**t», suppyate, is the bSJ ein, padhAna, and
igGDl, bhutvA, the qrtoOsw^oso, rtppAdbSifefcriyA.
Examples of the uttaka'rtiNdv SSsstSS 6 v ® «55y
chinnftf ukfcbo’, an axe , that by which a tree is cut, dtv, pa-
l^araNatt, a i CeapOn, that by which persons dri diruck.
Example of the uttasAmpadAsrf. Sntsj
dinnasuriko, he to whom tribute is given, a king; $«.©’
wd&atnX), dakkhiN e>yo, he its Whom gifts should be made ,• a
priest.
Exnmple of tbecrtxt>x5o£)Y«rt, uftapA<M«a # «3cgt»ewn*<»d
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
♦Al/t AAA'MMAJt.
w1g*ataj»mo, that froth rihidh men beret gone firth ftht. K tillage'-:
4Ss>&0, bhiuiO, he fiom whom danger is apprehended, viz. a Rhk»
shasa.
Examples of uttidhdro. ®«8W®5s»OJ*, matta-
m&taggaM, that in which furious elephants are residing , vie. a Jb-
vm*;— <J' i,«£>£)'',rokkhav6, that wherein are trees , via. a country:
VPOfcCW*, ksana*, that on which persons sit, viz. a chair.
Examples off tbe ^oxsew®, uttasSmf, or possessive ease,
^eo©»©8, dasabak), he\ who has Ike strength of ten (elephants*)
viz. Budu; veniko, he whose science is that of playing
on. musical instruments, via a Gandkurwa.
t3®o»C30, sum&so, or compound terms may be formed with
«oti ns in every case, but the t£eoa**9, kitako, affix, is used in
all cases the possessive-excepted* •' ' « <
’The e»€5et»0, taddhito, affix, is used for all eases, the «)<$&
ieratta, ami <f©©> avadhi, instrumental and ablative excepted.
The tp9©»e»*, &ky&taM, or verb, is used with the URWXT,
%attu,and kanamatr, or nominative and instrumental and
accusative cast.
The different uses of the cases of nouns.
The second ease is used to express acts of two kinds, volun-
tary and involuntary icchito, aud tftn&&*e»o,
eniechito,) on the part of the agent; as, SJffl* ©*V£J, buddhas*
vande, I worship Buddkos dauyaUait bhun-
jati, he eats a diminished cup iqf food.)
The above are instances at vobtsststry wets,
m »ak®«* ©t)f£, kantakafe waddati, As treads oh a thorn i 0
<8* <S(Sea» visangilati, he twaitous pm oot n '
These are ioSfcarteeeof imolwttmry sets.
<*Ses rftutffi §a^CM©3,*fedmk gaechaw ruhkha mti-
- iastapasappati, going to At v M age , hsmsme to « tut. This is
Digitized by
Google
MO
TAU GRAMMAR*
an instance both of voluntary and involuntary acts, or rather
of a desired and undesired object ; the village being the former
and the tree the latter.
The following are examples of the qp«®8w<®eS©0> akathita-
kamroo.
tccs>£0 C$«>$*©0©, bhagavi bhikkhu etadavoca, Bud-
dho said this to the priests ; Ocreia esS’esodoS, birauo ka*
paMkaroti, (with) the beru grass he makes a mat.
In these examples the priests and the beru grass are the epos
£e)«mc>9&9, akatitakammo, because they have no connection
with the verb.
The «y**StB03«E©3, akatikammo, is to be found in verbs pre-
ceded by nouns in the Second case.
There are three other sorts of <9)*Sg9, kammo, viz.
«33b?, nibbatti, vikati, knsxS, patti ;—.«»£• esotfotS,
kapaM karoti, he makes straw ; o.e5* £s2o®C3<», kappliaM jhdpe-
ti, he burns fuel (firewood) SOC3C3W, rupa vipassati, he
beholds a figure.
The firet is an example of the «*&<5xS«sS)©.>, nibbattibam-
maM, where the object is something formed or produced.
The second is an example of the 8«nea«x€)@*y vikatikam-
s»m, where the object is something destroyed.
The third is an example of the ooj&wSSt, pattikammaM,
where the object is something beheld.
The second case is also used with words denoting a substance ,
a quality, or an action , and including the ideas of time and tra-
velling i as, goc;.©o*t3^G«*M, m&saM mdsod u no, fish (foodyjor
a month &G>aZccotf:%, saradaM raNlydnadt, a pleasing
river in the clear season j ©ot3«tt«S0 , oc3ao, mdsaMsajjayati, he
reads {for ) a month / — •cflCtJ'en* ©e»<JoiS, yojanoM vanardjf,
a line or row in the forest, one yodun (m extent) eotttfen* ^ffcoo
c£)e<D3, yojaaaM digho pabbato, a mountain one yodun highs
•«DtC* tSt£?ocft6 > kosan sajj4yati, Ac reads (Jbr) a Kota, ( thadis -
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PALI GUAM MAH.
m
Mice of 500 bom;) <*<.«£). 8®e#0 so* »©»«*??, rukkhaK
anuvijjota tecando, the moon shines on the trees tn succession.
Here tfws 5©* rukkhaM, is denominated the lakkha*
nan, and ©ae-SJo, cando, the (•«©«>£)•, lakkhitabbaM.
The preposition anu, denotes repetition, and similar phra-
ses, are denominated ©8tfo> vicchii, as are also the following
where the noun is repeated, viz. c»o*©o c©0®©> <»©*©«», gimo
gamo gammyate, it is said from milage to village ; CS)©®3 CC3©®0
d®^6»ooo, g&mo gamo ramamyo, the villages are respectively
beautiful; <3.3*® «n*’®t*'<3*, gdme g&mejalaM, water from village
to village; W30 ®^6^»«3t5>0®0?5>5©«r3, sddhu devadatto mS.
taramanu, DevadaUa is kind to his mother; ®»ef«!Qfiae9
««^oawss, yadhattlia maManusiyitaMdiyatu, ifthereis anything
here for or belonging to me, let it he given, or if my share is here
Sfe. ef ©o5oer><3, nadiu anvasita b&r&nasi, Bara-
nais is near the river ; tp«je30<SQ«» • C5 *^£o«S«kQ, anusari-
puttaM pannavi bhikkhu, a priest inferior in learning to Saripul •
ta.
In the same manner the prepositions «©, paj)i, »<?, pari
and qt8, abhi, are joined to nouns in the second case, to express
different relations.
Sometimes the second case is used instead of the sixth ; as,
».o©o:3€«t*>*©« S3CR, > t:\MkopanabagavantaM, this has (he
same acceptation ; as, C 5 CC 5 t»cc©>«3, tassa bhagavato, that
Buddha's. *
__ The second case is used in construction with tf anta*
r&, tfmeno.0, auto, o ©5', tiro, cstSoesr, abhito, C3<J®w>, pari-
to, C3©tS33, pajibhfy &c. as, <f<53OJtf?©«:>0£:e*J», antaracana*
landaM, and within the ffihara called NAIanda;
antora]){>haM, within the country ; wetforffS*, tiroraJ)j)haM, out-
side of the country ; «f»*«»Jcno©* oSsxossw©*, abhitogimaM
parito g&maM, round about the village; ^es©j ©*»©tOiS, upa*
m&maM pa^ibhdli, the comparison or simile is understood by me.
The second case is sometimes used instead of the third,' the
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
V+iie.njLM*An*
m
seventh, 4 be fourty and the fifth ; a«, ©•ewcQttCsS, manna*
ladisaati, he will not speak with toe; ta©oflr «S£D$40>
©3* pubbaaljaaamajaM nivaaetvd, having, drench in the fore-
noon ,
Tbe verba &C3, vasa, to dwell ; S, si, fo reif; 4W3, fisa, fa iff/
S:, fch4, to stand; St% visa, fo enter, when preceded by tbe
prepositions upa, anu, qpSD, adhi, efc, 4, q»t§* abhi
w, ni, require to beconnected with a noun in the second case>
as, <?«2QcscSc|Si)C5S gimaMupava-
mti amivasati adhivasati avasati, he Awelh by, or with, after ^
over f or at the village ; ofcO©* q^cSets^eo cpc3&69*»
giman adhisete adhiti^hati ajjhivasati abbinivi-
sati, he rests i stands, dwells , in the village, or enters therein.
Verba of drinking and of moving , govern a noun in the se*
com! case ; as, srt$.QQ&>, nadiwpivati, he drinks(in ) tjhcriver j;
c g4maMcarati, he walks in (the) village ;
•©Sen*, pacc&rocemitan, I will tell thee afterwards ;
oao?«, pubbhenagamaM, in the forepart of the village .
The above are examples of the second case, used instead, of
the fourth, and fifth.
Words called kriy£ visesana m, which though
nouns, frequently answer to adverbs in English, are put in the
second case ;, as, tg®*5>t3«8, sukhaMseti, he deeps well or at his
me*
^ceo8?e3t3«rf, kriydvisesanaM, are a class of words which
can be connected with tg, bhu, to be; t&d, kara, to do; and all
otlief verbs as in the above instance
sukhaMsayanaM kareti, is synonymous to tt©*«C3 03, sukhaMseti,
and ts© # , sukhaw, in that example is the Quest aesa*, visesa*
naM, to sayanaM, and in the neuter gender.
All words coming under the denomination of 4§coo0©fc3C3
«•, kriylvise&anaM, must be in the singular number and in the
neuter gender ; as, bhikkhttftqkhambhitQ, th$
were in adobe of comfort*
Digitized by LjOOQ le
PArl>i OlAMMA#.
133
That which ie thp agent of a verb whether k>aai-
rnattaM, active , op qjK5X3)*G^, atbatthaM, neuter , is termed
kattii ; as, C3©<v«o, sudeira
thatbjaM ka££he$>i odano pace ate, food is cooked by the, cook in ;
a pot with fuel; ^a*$:S<Scd£B 3 , t rauni pas4da
padelji phiyate, the king stands on his feel in the palace .
Id the above examples paccate, is the* -oaSS>S$%
kamraatthaw, and < 800 3>«^ pbtyate, the yxsf&igb §jOO,. attattha,-
kri}4*
The third ease .
The implement or instrument with which an action Is per-
formed is put in the third or implementive case, which is then
denominated *a< 54 ^ , karaNaM.
The karaNaM, is of two kinds, ©0^33; Mljya, and
ajjhattiko; as, 9*5> g^neo, d4tte-
ria vi jim lunati, he cuts paddy with a 'sickle ; «><sr>»*3X5fa*3
feS 3 taL) 9 >eo, nettena can daw ikkhate, he beholds the mooh with th&
*ye. f ' v
In the above examples daltena, is the ©stofitaotf
40r*j baljyakaraNaM, or extraneous implementive case, and
6*5X5D«o, nettena, is the ajjhattikakara-
NaM. t3^>, sal)a, alaw, Mm, and some otheT wordV
when used in construction with a noun, govern the third case;
ps, (£®i5*5i*n t»^5§dxSc3«>(30DeD-8?, puttena satjavutti thnlo-'
dhanaMva; the £362, sal^a, in the above example may be op-
tionally omitted ; «3p^3 # ^©3£a^t5^5D, alaMtevasena, thou has dzoe/i
long enough , or of his dwelling there has been enough ,
E3!5X kiMtejaJja^.i, what has thou to do with curled hair.
Nouns signifying the means by which any purpose is accom-
plished are put in the third case; as, amiena
va>ati, he lives by means °ffiod.
The third ease is sometimes u?ed instead ot the seventh ; as*-
*©« c^w®., pubbena gi ms^fi 9 J^i}ie fire pari of the village* , J(
Digitized by {jOOQle
m
PALI GRAMMAR*
The place of bodily infirmities is put in the third case ; as,
tfz akkhin&k&NO, blind with one eye.
The person or thing with which another is connected or
associated, or by which it is distinguished, is also put in the
third case ; as, ecstteCBtpeft gottetana gotaroo, by
family a Gotarna .
The third case is sometimes used instead of the second ; as*
©«£, tilelji vapati, he sows ( with) Tala seed.
Sometimes the third case is used instead of the fifth ; as, S3
©cfl. ©&D0t3©<®«>e^ suuiutla mayaM tena maljd-
s&manena, we have escaped from that Buddha .
Sometimes it is used instead of the first case ; as, ^«X»«*30©
attan&va attanaM sammanni, by himself he
knows himself or in other words, he knows himself.
The third case is used to express the habitual possession of
my thing; as, paribb&jakau ti-
daNtSena addakkhi, he saw a pilgrim with a stick having three
points
The third case is used to express what is termed <a§c3 x*
©•cswd, kny&pavagge, that which is done with rapidity ; as,
e'JiemQ ©0d0t^>fl.C30o30fl, eka geneva bar&nasipayasi, he
went with one day to Bdranasi , ( that is, in one day.)
It is also used to express likeness ; as, ©Q*ntfOC3i>©3, ni&tara*
samo, like (with) the, mothers and time, a8,'«weQt*> OSS)C3©
kalena dhamma savanaM, the heariug of a religious dis-
course with time) (that is in time, or at the proper time*)
pubbo, and some other words of similar import, govern
a noun in the third case ; as, ©oettencjeSft, mdsenapubbo, a
month ago; •cStgocflttW GC3C3.w®cn:83£, yebhuyyena upasaM-
kauiittyadij he approaches frequently.
The fourth case.
Words are put in the fourth case when they denote objects
to y towards, for, at , or against , which any thing is done or intended ;
saraanassa eivaraM dad&ti, he gives
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
FA LI GRAMMAS.
135
a priestly garment to a priest ; C3©«3t£3 ®do®®05 ttS*, same
nassa rocate saccaM, truth is pleasant to a priest; cOQsytayQesns
€263 rfOJW* Qo<3a3®«>, yannadattassa chattaM dharayate, he holds
an umbrella to Yagnyadattu.
Words termed 5p«3o'o, anird, anumantu, and Cf 1 )
<ftQ«SK3X39o, drddakattd, require to be constructed with a
noun in the fourth case; as, di«aS)ea6} d <*.&$§>, rukkhassa ja-
laMdeti, he gives water to the tree;tS3*5£)»&30 SJ£.®£«r, bikkhu-
no jalaHdeti, he gives water to the priest, ep<53®«>0 d'(3*©Qeo,
atthino jalaMdeti, he gives Water to the beggar.
Verbs of praising &c. govern a noun in the fourth case.
These verbs are termed silaghadi ; as, ^©6263 fl<;o
68®***, buddbassa silagbate, he praises Buddho ; tn « tBts\jcXS3 , l
IjanutetuyhiaM, he conceals M) from thee , ( literally to thee ) £,53©
®ei>osis t3«a»ot5X5»«5>, upatipjjlieyya sakkyaputt&naM, he waits
on the sons ofSakya ; s^cso* C3e3®«,, tuyljaM sapate, he swears to
thee; K©<^s^*®wcD:c3c35ies5, suvaNNaMtedh&rayate,Ae owes to
thee gold; C3@So«r»* ©Sococs^ge^o, samiddhdnaM piljayan,
tidaliddo, the poor are fond of the rich ; cnueseg^&w, tassa kuj-
jhati, he is angry at him; £5*3oflC5 <*e3D«n* ®©®880, dutjayati di-
Sanaa megho, the rains destroys the regions ; ©eS oto f tacaoaS
titthiyd issanti samananaM, the Terlakas (or persons
professing the Braminical faith,) envy the Samanas (or priests of
theBudhuist faith;) £t^««0 cg«2©<5355W£Woa«»», dujjand gu-
navantd usuyanti, the wicked detest (to) the virtuous; epo<5o®0j
•@tf ®e^a5^0 doea>«>©o, dradhome raniio rajanaM vfi, my request
is to the king, or the kings ; efOoseaSseoo £Ot3®53c,®c3®©'j
«8®t26M etoc8t3®«X53»Bo, ayasmato upasampad&pekho npatbso
ayasmantasivd, Upatissa is desirous of conferring the office of Qty
C3055C,, upasampadd, on the aged person.
In both the preceding examples the noun is likewise in the
second case.
In the following example the second case is used instead of
Digitized by Google
PALI OftAMltAt.
06
the fourth ; tb*>63 t3«£} «5»q#0‘3©, bhagavi bhikhbu etada-
voca, Buddho said this to the priests.
^asffleo»8»eB0 eSatiewes. <p 513 era «;*§), bhikkhu bhaga'va-
to pacca8sosuM asunanti, the priests listened, (or listen attentively)
to Huddho.
Tbe first verb is compounded or the prepositions cjS, part,
•and <f, a, and the root S3, su; the second has the preposition 93,
d, prefixed to the same root ; ef era* 03®* «3®&5, bhik-
khu janan dhammaM s&veti, the priests cause the people to hear
a religious discourse. In the above example the second case
tTera*, janaM, is used instead of the fourth. eX«£© aerao ef*«ra3
^<2<»-rf«oe9 eiejcfl-erOewSo, hhikkbuno jane anugisati patigi-
*£tivi, the people permit (to) the priest.
Verbs of declaring, informing, or announcing , #c. require a
noun in the fourth case; as, ^D^erasuos©®©?, iiuantay&mivo,
I declare to you.
Words termed en^s£>S tadatthuM, govern a noun in the fourth
case; as, os©3:>3 t3»*rae©0, yuddhaya sannaddho, armed' for
tattle.
Words termed «£©<&*, tumatthaM, that is words having the
same meaning, as if the affix were subjoined to them, are
put in the fourth case; as, ®<33*?)3«ra«R®C)3ctf, lokdnukampiya,
through compassion for the world
Here tfents.Q&’ioS, anukampdya, being in the fourth case is
equivalent to anukainpituM*
Words termed 9 < 5 «)-ed*, alamattai*, or verbs connected with
aiaM, must be in the fourth case ; as, CK*V©o rVi :) ©qgcao
fc yy ao flfcreoSeo, alajaamallo mallassa mailassa ara^ativd, a
warrior is fit for a warrior (via. a match for him.) 9©* ®# BQ
w<p 9 eo«ra, alau mesuvhNNena, to me there is a gold enough.
In the first example the word 9©* alax, denotes fitness, and
In the second rejection, as a declaration that enough hot hem re-
Digitized by Google
MM OBAN BAB* , 1ST
ceived implies the rejection of my fitrther quantity that might be
offend.
The verb ©eo, non*, to think, esteem at took upon, psomm
• noun in the fourth ease, provided that naen denote an htanb-
mate substance and dkrespett be intended, as, ABCAettotid*
©wa^satj, k»££ha#9S tva* imtiKe, / loot upon thee as (ktrralty
Jbt*) a Stick, or log,
Bm the second care to need in the following ewampios>)
«g<®* ©• gaddrabhaM trau mafffie, I leek upon Hue
as an ass; tggHriefo ©* M)9>9aq33%, •uvasKau trait maSfirj
/ look upon thee as gold.
Verbs of motion may either govern the fourth er the eecdnd
ease ; as, «rtsjcSE5»e«M «»S*c®e<ew©^ gfonassagato giiniusgs*
Uni, gone to the village.
ferbs of blessing or praying fin, gbvern a noun in the fourth
esse; as, tcqj* #OM(eg, bhavato bhaddear Jjotu, may
good happen to you. Sir.
Verbs denoting-efoctfo* or mvasfetovr thorns, govern • noun
in tko fourth case 5 m, -afcUi osBoimatune, tba
chaioe or consen t of many is a gr ee able to me.
aW t, hihyo, much, governs a noon in the fourth e*6pj 4%
deottecss ©OJOJOcfl, bhiyoso roatlfi) a, in great measure.
Sometimes the fourth ease is used instead of the eevjM# ;
m, tnr^aM &vikaronsi, I mil explain in
thee; £ ) 0&.ntS» mSvtH'#, upamnc te karissimi, J mU give
thee an example.
.Certain words used ie mhrtitim. govern a noun in the
fourth code ; as, ened&fm, srasnote, eoissSe/emAo thee j <otozt&
exdfrm«, ootthi perjtaaM, hsa&hio the people t t B fa sft e» * *<s r #»i«
getaWte, « goodjoutnCy ie them.
The interogation <£», kiM, in some constructions governs a
noun in the fourth ease j as, d&»€>C*s € ban vippajtisi-
raja, ahai ( occasion ) Jbr regret.
n '
Digitized by
Google
138
FA LI GRAMMAR*
,vl The fifth case*
Words are put in the fifth or proper ablative case, wherever
separation is implied, as when in English the preposition from
is put before a noun. The object when u fear or danger pro*
ceeds or is (apprehended is also put in the fifth case, as is the per*
son or thing from which any thing is taken ; as,
g£m6apenti, they go from the tillage ; cor£bh£«
yanti, they are afraid of a thief
upajjh&y* sikkhaM gnNl)&ti, he takes instruction from the teacher /
C^^5®Ooff®K>v^330 9>«), upajjayanalja adhiyate, he reads or
learns to read from the teacher .
In the use of words importing separation from an object, in
motion, or from an object at rest, ©*<30, calo, and <f©*QVaca-
lo, the object is put in the fifth case ; as, <*C2fc30Qo©<§>«>0 #ttO<3>C3a
tseeo, assadh^vato posopate, the man falls from a horse running ;
CSRCD, .rukkh& palaM pate, the fruit falls prom the
tree .
When the preposition t$cfr, part, is prefixed to the root eJ,
ji f to- conquer^ the noun in construction must be put in the .fifth
'case : as, buddhasmi pa-
rtjenti annatitthiy&, persons of a different faith cannot prevail
over lluddho .
But if the second case be used in const ruction with the same,
the superiority of the agents* is indicated ; as, 8
repttM parajavati viro, the brave man subdues his enemtes m
When the preposition M, pa, is prefixed to the root tg y
so as to form a word signifying origin without separation.
The non n used in construction must be put in the .fifth case;
S&' te'CQ?t3cro &navat»ttarol}& mal)a*
sart pabh^vanti, from (1 the lake ) Anawatalta the great rivers pro*
ceed.
.. In like- manner the root j£, denoting origin 9 requires a
noun in the fifth case ; as, tree*, pemato jiya-
te bhayaM, fear originates in affection , or proceeds from affection .
Verbs implying contempt or disinclination y require a noun in .
Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMAR*
199
the fifth case; as, *030*<&g8tf**», adhammijigucchate, he
despise* acts of injustice ; *0390 «>, adhammd patnajjati,
he is disinclined to or averse to ads of injustice •
Some noons require to he construed with another in the fifth
case; as, cp$cd:cxoq£&, tatoppabhuti, thenceforward; o 0 #e»O
C30\)#, yatosar&mi, yrom what time I remember .
The pronoun *23$ as*, anaa, likewise, requires in some con-
structions a noun in the fifth case ; as, wo<^ia$*£a5j£)D, nan-
fiadukkha, there is nothing but affliction , or there is no other thing
than affliction . e^S^otRO, bliinto devadattfi, sepa-
rated from Devadalto .
Some prepositions govern a noun in the fifth case; as, *3t09
COoC **acJX5i ©O^crf, apasdldya Ayanti w&nija, merchants come
from the hall ; *oS^£5*a) e£,o *©C5£C0C*>©c£e», &brahmalok&
aVihuggacehati, tV ascends to or as far as Brahma lolca.
Nouns in construction with the preposiiion oqd, pati, in the
acceptation of similarity, barter or exchange, are put in the
fifth case; as, ©©ri8>jOm coo<?cj w’TOr, buddhasmfc pati s&ri-
putto, Sariputlo is like Buddho : iir which instance the lesser
is compared to the greater object;
«, satamassa telasma padad&ti, he gives to him clarified butler
in exchange for oil •
The fifth case is said to l>e «>®et5J3S>, karakamajjhe,
in the following example; gJ£*<M few C3«sfi)c2®>
8t4B®s5, luddhako ito pakkhasma migaM vijjliati, the huntsman ,
em the fifteenth day from this time, will shoot deer; 8%^^ t
wws>«OC33 -agc^cf* St$3®5, luddako itoko«4 kuiijaraM vijjati,
the huntsman at the distance of a call from hence shoots an c/e-»
phant •
Example , of a noun in the fifth ease, between two verbs $
ft# 8es43a«b e«5®cj©:> £c56»w, ajjn vijjitva pakkhasrafi vij-
jliati, having shot to day , Ac a?i// iAoo/ on the fifteenth day of the
moon .
Nouns in construction with adverbs are sometimes put hi
Digitized by
Google
FAtt «»A» MAI
Jie
the fifth, i(i -the- second and sometime? m the third
case ; as, ePoc&Mt ® 0 «g»> sto egoless 83, rat)ilaraittiija
mdtujaM m&tujena w4, without being born of a mother y Seta
e?®5®'3 aS>9&r 8 #, rite saddbammi saddhainmaM
saddhaiunteha. wfi, Without religious knowledge or teaching;
anoenoag^o t'05«)\ nftnfikuki pabbajit®, betame prints, from
various fismHis, qtf **e£ %<3o«8 W t awyebi pothageviyajs,
he hm separated himself from the print.
Verb* signifying preserxmtitm, fa. are eonetreed #ith a noua
ia the fifth cate; as, c»0gewfl«»o®ou’«aOe«b5 *©*>w»x 4 )»
-ucchuto sig&le rakkhanti khetto, they keep the Jack alls from the
field of sugar castes ; oa£ 9 es0otBoQ«n&tftOO&3 w©MSXa> yav&
fajHaedheeti gtvo kheKe, they keep the ctftfio from or out of the
field of corn. .
But verba implying preservation do not always require the
fifth ease in construction 5 as, eiaemwft, dcfifij bhatako
ynvaN rakkhati, the servant watehes over the earn.
. Th* object of dislike or aversion is pot in; the fifth cane ? as,
fistxso, npajjhfiyi attkandhfira*
yati «isse, the pupH conceals himself from his master .
In tha following example the seventh ease ia subetitated tor
the fifth ; as, atf «B©e*f 3 5 f«n©id &®e»o, jetawane aotarahito,
Hie has cosktaled himself from the garden of Jeta, (that is from the
parsons residing in that garden y) er rather he has disappeared from
the garden of Jeta.
Words implying distance, require a noun either in the fifth
Clan, or in the second case, or in the third; as, gooett
gtft go cf **»£«, dura to igaaimn <1 fir aw dfirenawfi, having coma
from afar; epccJ'wo »ea *Sb« ^<SC33 0®0®««a3:>Q8©Owwcea
firaktte moghe purisa dhammawinayi dhom*
tnaneinayatt dbamatawineyenawi, these vain (or silly ) men are
far from the religious precepts of Buddha.
Words implying nearness are also construed with a noon in
th* second, tbiffS, nodi fifth case, bi, tsBey wsaQom&meBw
Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMAR.
HI
jyj, . nnntpaM g4®& g&uiRM gimenawf, steer tit the tiling*.
Word* signifying the distance between places «r times, trt
construed with a noon in the fifth case; as, ©Qtfaaj ©igagoma
rifamse} ea» w>CX 3 ‘, madhuriya catusuyojauesu sajakasaaot, from
Madura an four yd duns is Sankasta (that is Sank ass* is finer
yodvns from Madurai) feMBM ©awergaS ito
ekaaaw uti ka pparoattake, nintijj one kalpes from this time..
Sometimes the fifth case is substituted for the participial affix
teb, tw4 : as. eawae, ta-woScfln, pisidi sanJuktuey ya, hr goes
up to the palace; instead of CMWXJf q&tfveSodo W.WMS®*fli»
p&s&daM abhirhijitwa saMkaineyytt; sfocssno £,Qd$tecoM, fiaanC
uj>j)hal)eyya, he rises from kit seat, instead of aotii
SJS)o Qtba'Jitai g, asane nmdrtw4 u^bajyeyya*
Words signifying « particular region or quarter 'require %
noun in the fifth case; as gd'tgj®®«no «t©©w* no £&£, porat*
thimato avicito upnri, on the east above Asoichi.
The object of comparison ia put in the fifth case, in construe*
tinn with adjectives for which the word than is used in English.
This is called fctca.oj, wibige, dtscriminatmt or distinction;
af t eO«mo G4th*>a>»&?, yato pan Ita taro, mere eminent than any
one.
. Words signify iag restraint or ref tuning from, govern a noun
ia the fifth case ; as, c*Ws)02®J ©O’ da, gamadhamntd tyituti, he
abstains from fornication.
Words signifying purity, «©*«&, suddhattlie, also require
a noun in the fifth ca«e ; as, ®o fcj#©y mat ito suddho,
pure from the mother (tha't is, by the mother's side ;) — c^webStvj
#<8d, pamocanatthe, or words signifying escape or deliverance
front nny thing, govern nouns in the fifth case ; as, §>*o»o«») cf
muttoai&ra bandhanh, escaped from the bonds of sin, ~
•5 $>§i)ota5, lyettwatthe, words used in a causal signification,
•re put in the fifth case ; as, «eJSo o^zgeno, kasmfi Ijetunfi,
on rehal account, or jor rehat cause \ but they may also be put
in the second, third, aud fourth cases; as, s£.«wo"^», kihkdra*
Digitized by
Google
142
PALI GRAMMAR*
waM, MnmMot&crt?, kenabetun&j g, kissatjetu* fot
what cause ; S8oX9$5d, wiwittatthe, words signifying separa-
tion govern a noun in the fifth case ; as, 88o$)8«K>»§>?J3, wi.
wiccewakdinehi, separate from sensuality /*-C3®3Wo3d, pam&-
natthe, words denoting measure of distance are put in the fifth
case; as, 8^<3daod0, dighaso nawa widattiyo, nine
spans in lengthy -g£)i>aeo© 3 B, pubbhayoge, words in connection
with 2©> pubbha, are put in the fifth case ; as, g*£)$)we>®0
Oj, pubbhewasambodd, before the attainment of the wisdom of
Buddha ; bandhanatthe, words importing the
being bound or obliged , govern nouns in the fifth case, and
sometimes in the third ; as, C3«>eje)3©s©D C3e«>sn£>o, satas*
mi satenawd, bound for a hundred (pieces of money,) that is in
the sum of one hundred; — cgwQBiPo., gunawacaue, words im-
plying a particular quality , govern nouns in the fifth case; as,
<f*s£j& JoeaG, issariyd janaM rakkhati r&j£, the
king preserves the people by the influence of his posperity .
In some cases where a question is asked, or an explanation
given, the fifth case is substituted for the participial affix fiBo,
tw4, and sometimes the second and third ; as, cjQc$
«f*3 q&QGS* ^ptSa)^®3e^)&o, abhitlbamma pucchanti abhi-
dhammaM abhidhaumienava, they enquire after having heard
religious discourse , instead of epccQSE*
Qd@@ £)©3&0, abhidhammaM sutvapuccbanti nbhidliatnme
J>hatv&v&, qptS S)®®3
abhidhamma kathayanti abhidhammaM abhidhainmeuava,
after learning by heart or being established in religious doctrine
they give an explanation of it, instead of qC£0©© # c<§©0
5*8^00, abhidhammaM pa^hitvi katayanti
abhidhamme ^hatvavd-
thokatthe, words implying smallness or insignifi-
cance, are put either in fifth or third case; as, §©§5
thok£ muccati thokenavd, he escapes for a small
matter.
Digitized by
Google
PAL! GRAMMAR.
113
The sixth case .
The sixth case is the genitive. When two words come together
of different meaning*, not bearing a certain relation to each
other, one of them is put in the genitive case; as,
8©<5., bhikktino civaraM, the garment of the priest;
nar&namindo, the chief of the people ;
nagarassa samipaM, in the vicinity of the city ;
suvaNNassarasi, a heap of gold; rukkhassasa-
kha, the branch of a tree .
The first examples is termed cflEtt-xS*, yassayaw, that which
belongs to any one i the second, tflo®, sami, lordship or superi-
ority; the third samfpo, proximity ; the fourth,
samut)o, multitude; the fifth, avayavo, member or in*
tegral part .
The sixth case is likewise used' in other constructions, —
ljetuyoge, a causal connection ; as, ®5)£X39toC{>,
buddhassahetu, by means of Buddho .
t3<* 5?<s><50, sadisatthe, words implying equality or likeness ;
as, 02$ee3 pitussa sadiso, like the father*
coQoe ooflOac©, antappaccaya yoge, — in connection
with words terminated by the affix q a anto; as,
S)*5X£C»., musaw&dassa ottappaM, the fear of falsehood .
giiNayoge,«— in connection with wdrds import*
ing a quality ; as, C5©eoon£)0, pannaya papubh&vo f
- the skill of wisdom ; (that is derived from wisdom.)
C3?S*n»5d, sujitatthe,— words implying fullness or comple-
tion ; palanaM titto, filed with fruit; qoV
puraM Jiranja suvaNNassa, full o fun-
wrought and wrought gold .
^oroeco, nip£tantara yoge, — in connection with
words having a medial term indeclinable ; as,
vasalassakatv&, having made him an outcast .
»0®£, kale, — words denoting time; as, ©30C»
tgtftS, m&sassa dvikkhat tuM bhufijati, he eats twice a month.
Digitized by LjOOQie
tU
FA LI (mAHUni
Words in connection with the root ruja, to pain or
ache; as, (5uf cd, devattassa rujati, Dewadai is
pained, or suffers pain .
vattamfine tayoge kattari,
ta construction with words having the participial affix » f but
used as verbal nouns ; as, 35^ottsS®#coD, ranno saramatc^
the tome# if the king .
The genitive ca*e is also applied in the following instances
vie. tfwB d'«na«W, jannya janako, in connecting the production
teith the produce; 000* 8o0e tmo,v&caya vacako, the speech with
the speaker ; ©a»0d* 8 vikara vik&riya, tAe species with the
genus ; codasJcfl*, pari m&na para roeyya, the measure
with that which is measured ; c^$cd^£) , puratta puritab-
bo, that which fills and that which is filled ; as, C[e43KX3 9
ranna putto, the king's son ; saddassattho, the
meaning of a word ; S5tX0 0«JD3>cTO, khirassa vikaro, buttermilk
or curds ; or^e*)*©®, tilanaM mu£>J)hi, a handfull of Tila seed ;
cdS®o 0©0#C3, vass&naM tatiye rnAse, the third month
of the year .
Where property is implied the noun may he either in the
sixth or in the seventh case; as, C30®, gon&naMs&mi,
Wt&oe«tg ©OOMB?, gonesu vatyAdi, the proprietor of the oxen.
©0d'#^w 9 niddharaNe. Words implying separation , or sin~
gling out of a multitude are put either in the sixth or seventh case;
as, efttfow ©wco^ceo W <5ers><5o n&ranau katthiyo
surataro naresuva, amongst men the JKattria is most valiant;
*xa85«>®;> cftoQca So, ka n J jdgivinaa*
sampannakhlratam& g&visu\&, amongst cows the black cow 4s
that which gives most milk ; • cD3©»S«£»e®0
orQo, pathikinaM d h& van sigha tamo patikesuvi, amongst tra-
veller* the running messenger for he zcho travels post,) is the
quickest ; w$©$«*3»0 e©aco3 6^t£$Mea!gG^
bnlbiwui&ttaM devadatto paNgito bra}) manes uvd, amongst Brah-
mans Dewadatta is the {most) learned .
Digitized by LjOOQie
PAM. GRAMMAR*
lift
III some instances the seventh case is substituted for the first,
es well as for the sixth case; as,
tdampissa Ijoti silasmiM, this is his mode of observing precepts •
When disregard is intended the noun is put sometimes inihe
sixth and sometimes in the seventh case; as, <5iQe<ao
C5©a?, rudato darakassa pabbiiji, or o©
*8, rudantasmiM darak« pabbaji, he became a priest whilst the
child was crying^ or disregarding the weeping of the child Ss
Sometimes the sixth case is used instead of the third or se-
venth; as, pupphassa buddhaw vajati, he
warships Buddho with a flower offerings (pr makes an offering o^
flowers to Buddho)
«M®Q©tf<5S, kiraalamaUhe, the adverbs kirn, what? and
<*©•, alaii, enough , hold! way govern a noun in the sixth case,
instead of the third or seventh ; «£•«> tXS, Jmm tassa, what by
him; tassa enough by lupi.
In the following example the sixth is used instead of the
seventh case; as, *gC $<30 ««§) oSqaap, kusala nacca j^itassa,
skilled in dancing and singing. .
Words followed by others 'having the affixes *0, ta, or cb^),
tabba, subjoined are put in the third, and cannot be put in the
6ixth case; as, desjto may a, preached by me ;
fiesS'o, tabba bhikkhunll)i sikkh£, religious
precepts should be observed by priestesses.
The sixth case is somMiuies used instead of the second or
fifth ; as, «*S®tJC3 MW5X3b0^tf?, kammassa katt&ro, the doers of
an act; ©O^ECSUOcTod, m£tussa sarati, he remembers his month;
6*atapf0tf^, pitussa icebati, he longs for his father ;
fid, telassa dayati, he gives oil; udakas-
so patikurute, he purifies the water , or makes it good; C5o©
«&C3<5?9) ££>££}) sabbe tasantidatf Sassa, all afraid of punish-
ment.
Words to which the affixes «>©<5X35j tavantu, woO, t£vi,
gty tv$, kng, nrfna, nuka, $ c. are sub*
?
Digitized by LjOck e
140
PA 171 tftfXtfftAll.
joiftftf govern notate W the second fctfse, and never tnf the sixth ;
as,* ratlirfft faltl*'
katavr Icar&no kurum&no, havin'* constructed t/ie ettfrttige, the
person by whom the carriage has bfrti rhddi, the: person (errtploijed
ifi) shaking the carriage; eswa^s; pasavo, dr m&fO&to ',' -
p6save ghsttako, the destroyer offbitr Jboted be ox Is.
When a noun with a dSeaa ft, kitaka affix corrtes iff CtiftMc-
tion with two nound one of which is the ageftt flWd the other
the object, ^-the hgent is not put iri (he sixth case,* but the
object* is ; as,wfed dfooeo *«a>eri £cx$oett*oo‘s><»o, acch&riyd
firajakena vatthanaMrSgoy the dyiftg of cloth, by a person ndt d
dyer, is wonderful
The Seventh Cade.
The seventh drise is the locative , tfnd is hsed in vdHdtfs ac-
ceptations, but more particularly in those denoting the pi dee of
of any action or passion* It is also termed
dkSsak&rake.
The acceptations in which the seventh" case is chiefly used
are — 1. opasilesika, clinging to, or adhering to,
in or within, or upon; as, ©o<£ , g hashes uv&ri, water in
the pots. — 8. t)f£c6 9 visaya, place; as, C3<3*'S ©Srfo, salile
fnacch6,^wA of the, water. — S. <?{3fcbtf)C3, abby&sd, by or near ;
&s, t8£C3*, iiadiyaM sass&M, the corn near the rivtr o4,
©^6e», vydpika, that which is Spread through any thing ; as,
fi*©C3 **»©•, tilesuteliM, oil in the T{Iq seed#.
The seventh case is sometimes substituted fop the $$©e), kain-
ina, (second case,) karaNa, (third case,) and
nimitta, or casual case ; as, © 5 ££0C3 «sd •<$>?©')
b4t}£sugal)etv& buddhani cumbitva, having taken (his) hands and
having kissed ( his ) head ; bliikkhusu
abhiv^denti, they salute the priests; C3oqX5jC 3 0§too3 ©cVoXS,
pattesn pir>54)a carauti, ifiey walk about /hr alms with their
' Digitized by
Google
PALI GRAMMA*.
147
Egging cups; 9 kuSjaro dantesu
^annate, the elephant destroys with his trunks,
The seventh case is substituted sometimes for the fourth;
a^ rarest; tsxs)', saghedinnaM, given to the priest • '
Sometimes also for the fifth; as, er«©8> kada-
llsu gajaM rakkhati, they keep the elephant from the plantain
trees.
A noun with its attributives is put in the seventh case in
construction with another word, where it is intended to express
coeval or subsequent action ; as^ t3®©o8 cs>»ta3, pub-
baNl^a samaye gato, he went early in the morning ; C3*S , SSC3 mtsu
a cc«eoo, saMghesu bhojeeya manesu gato, he went
whilst the priests were eating.
Prepositions adhi, and £«?, upa, give the wolds to
which they are prefixed the sen„e of the seventh case ; as,
«5is£>C3&3 ojSD3«so., upanikkhassa kahapanaM, a kahapana
C coin ) is worth more than a nikkha ; e:©3C3,
adhibraljmadatto pancala, the people oj Panchala are subject to
Brahmadatta ; q>a®<?®0C3 adhidevesu buddho, Buddho
is the chief of the Devatds.
Words having the signification of ®©t», maNSita, pleased,
gotten, ussuka, diligent, or zealous, govern nouns in the
seventh and third cases; as, C3M^®«>0 «^3«e3®*
© 0 , n&nena pasidito MnasmiMvC pleased with wisdom ;
«ra’ G ee5®«*0 issp«3WS*03, ifonenaUssuko niaasmiMvd, dili-
gent in ( acquiring ) wisdom.
* The difference between the end karaNa, and enStSKB, ni-
nitta case seems to be that the former denotes extraneous mstru-
neotahty, and the latter the operation of an n.stnimeut immediately
jonuected with the agent as the tusks ot au elephant, the band of a
nan, &c.
THE END.
Digitized by LjOOQie
Digitized by
Pali Verbs*
So*g.
Root.
CD©
todzs
&9Q04B
t3&
•cgaa
8«s>
Cf&
*8
©•-80
©83
©48
C 88 S 5-80
8«o
80 *Q
80-83
Cfodco
(3QO
©co
*p43
gc8
©<a
©eo»
e'csftfe
8«
e«j
©©
€89©
<**©
a©
*8©
00*386. *^C3.
Translation. Verb.
ttftSKXO C3»
©9©80
eo63Ds8
C3»SiL9©<0
€3* 8©9c3*
w ©qf
@ssa£©<do
ta©Qj
08093^095
©S^-eo
©8o:8@@a
CD®€D
053 ©80
©@®«D
oo 63 or ©«5aoS©Qos
€3©CD
t$taG&y
oo^3U<8
oo63§)t8
oo63i)(8
cd63©^
v 8»0©*O
cpC5»ft©«
ep«C9c3©«9 ■
@»GC©<2T>
©*35«5©®0
csoQ^^n
€899 ©-80
we<5
t»©63, Ae t*.
t9©63, Ae cooks.
ooQe563 qo©®<3, Ac goes .
toC&fS, he goes .
8©0©-a»^. Ae collects .
€3«8»63, he doubts .
8g8o63. he takes.
©«o*3, he 0 takes .
©8o63, he sounds (the voice.)
q»8o63, Ae regards .
©8»63. it sounds.
©•-co<9, Ae Aew</?.
©© s3, Ae adorns .
0*8o63, he bends.
w898o<3 1 Ae g*oe$.
880<3, Ae goes.
©063, he beautifies
««3©8o63. Ae thinks.
«f coco 63, Ae goes, also Ae Aemtr
0C5X®68, he adheres.
©JXft63, Ae seeta.
€f€£>63, Ae gv>e$.
? *o63, Ae travels •
*£>63, Ae travels.
gto^, Ae travels.
©CD ?3, Ae travels .
SQ5w< 9, Ae * praises or
commends-
dU&vi, he laughs.
cfC5S&63, he raises the value of
things.
8-t»63, Ae perfumes.
(3*«<0, he disobeys.
©o©<8, Ae speak s(as an orator )
<39063, he requests.
®ctf©63, Ae $klms\as the sun )
© €39© 63 , Ae disltcsses(Jhe mind)
©809063} Ae stammers.
Digitized by
Google
9
Pali terbs.
8©
8@8©eco *
*r©
e©
co8©eo
<6©
g©
-an©
•enette’en
€>©
@d'o©<5'<m
tpa
9
©0e^5i .
es©
e?88o@c3
o©
*>©
<|«343c3#
8©
t*<$543c3*
©©
a|*
3
* *
§©tf,
6's03'&
tpcyy®®
a*
*3<td<5'0n
Qzd®&*
G«£
tins
i|q543c3»
000 S' <50
<r*
Go8©«>
*zi
, dtaoo
rs>t£
q08^<?<5p
C55 430^3
t $d
jssiS^>®<^
tad
e§*<5'C50jS'f5O
&<£$
, «S)®C5(S‘'2p
"xad '
©^800©.^p
©ef
K50,^p3«*
««2f
C3 # ^@cl»
(Sd&p'zn
45)&d
*5ii£f®<3r>
<$&d .
<$&de> 2Q
ta&d
✓ ■
©8043* he comprehends.
q© 43, he offers ( religiously )
8 © 43, he travels.
46 ©45, he polishes (by rubbing
g©43, he puts away.
<iri843, Ac dances .
8043, Ac becomes pleased.
q©©43, he offers (religiously)
©843,, Ac jrf/Vjf
w©43, he becomes pacified.
00 ^ 8 43*, Ac drives (man ant*
mal.)
a»©43, Ac shines.
8043, he shines »
8043,- he bears.
4S, he asks.
Ac forgets
<3<e£43, Ae intimates {by signs)
eptl43, he turns (as a carpenter
t 3 <^ 43 , he cleans (as a table with
a towel.}
C&iQ, he cuts.
< 53 *Je 443 , Ac cute (o 5 « carppnfgr
with an adze)
8«£43, Ac grinds,
did Ac shines.
0 ^ 43 , he shines.
qW43, he shines.
<5^43, Ac desires.
he bruises.
cp£543’, Ac travels.
t*k*43, ;Ac shakes.
ta^43, he demeans himself ty*
to obtain favour .)
he unites.
$^43, Ac shakes.
cat* 43, he offers (m to a god.)
43^4}, he becomes cunning.
0t*43, he sends,
ts ^ 43 , he embraces,
he sinks,
he polishes.
Q^fd&ihc abashes.
*£<& d 43 , he threatens,
q&jd&y he ^collects: als(f 9
offers.
tsi fd&tJie adorns-
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
PAfM 1T0UM.
tc&a
tn&d
&4©<?
<g«f
q®*Q$#<Sto4®'5
■*8
qrQ9*d3t<0&4*S
totJV
-85
t«*8
f
<r? _
cp$3feA0taH
tea©©*#
t»8
e<?
St5MCfe5$t £b|j
**^8
ttfe#
S>88 •
es^ar^
a*?d©<M»
«p®C5D0^rt ©'^©’dS
88
^dft^S©©!*©©^
, w 8
8 wrf^ncO' eaa 0 «a
<5<arac i ®’erDg
&qo<$
e5©&
S8
Sfr $>«•<$■&
*8
0,©(3f£)©^
ess$
qp^woe©***
«oq
0* o5jc530©©
qp9d<sto«t^4©5
* 8
9
«T8
-daiS3©
©5C
rx&5&G<&
<rf8
ceaBoracsD^^g
©8
©8
ddd^CdOGG*
8§<8
tdtfd a&dtiB
*. ,
£.©0
«**«<{
3 '“
he dreates.
he roars (as thundtfr)
cgd<S* he sounds ( as indts*
tinrtfy as the sen <St.)
*gd«}. he sounds (indistinctfy
as the mice of bir ds$c.)
Ss? d he devours.
toc^dsS* he firs.
he glorifies or digUi - •
fies .
cp$*43, he binds.
he causes to oote
- out.
to 4^*3* he does good actio Hi*
he handles,
he colours (blue.)
©<^3Q, he strengthens .
he pleases.
«©* d*9$ Ar reflects .
bruises.
1 / pours.
he calls: also At
weeps.
it becomes cheap .
^<3* he gives.
<5^4*3, he sheds tears .
cG^^e, Ac * 2 >jA* / he travels /
Aa gives-
he becomes health fist
g.^, & vanishes , t7 wear*
away.
Aa scratches (as with
claws.)
he enjoys health •
eo^^a, Ae j/hy/A («s o/r orattn^
it sounds ( if [discrimi-
nate /y, as a beast.)
dei&i he eats,
he eats.
Sb<j A** rate. ,
fie request^ also, Aa
wttlh.
he loves.
£)q^, Ar becomes hungry \
he becomes poor •
c,<% he gives.
^ becomes jit lc*
Digitized by
Google
PALI VERB*.
4
©dO
©oabc3«
0o0<9, Ac hinders.
<£,©
o&tsoea
cg^43, he is displeased '.
ODOO>
*
c&o0d3, he makes Jbet hold, or
whereon to stand.
SQ
§J©C3*
g©^3, heincreases.
t9Q
§©C3*
c9©^3, he increases .
©9
©a 6&4*
©o^3, Ac &car*»
§© '
iS)Q»a
co^3fi8
§t5S®^3, Ac comprehends .
©t5S&<9,ft happens .
©S>
mt45B)£i, he makes war •
fcs>
he pierces.
^•moowdS®©
d>0<S, Ae pai «5 / alfto, he per*
feds .
6)0
©>ar5Q^^Q
©C5&&43, Ac Aiwfr.
«H>
6©§<8
f d'^S)^, ft occurs.
«)0
fi©@tS
wo© *3, it occurs.
oo®,«
e0;3, he drinks.
f«3©<3, ft enlighten*.
Ac honours.
f«3D
$*?3<9c3*
0«o
m®?»©©
©>eo<9, Ac respects .
O9^n@«o
«p«<9, Ac /iw.
$*33<»^B*Mr3<gsj
*»en<3, Ac enlightens ; he
walks / ft becomes fair.
S<s ..
©^?©D009cfe^
Steg<9, Ac jnoAtt pillars.
«es»
©GOO OS' >20
<%&&, he supports. '
*go*3, Ae conceals or cover?*
«g»
«)0
< m^swso
«aoS, Ac Acafr.
«>p
jdfes^C'ca
«oS, he enlightens.
§o<9, Ac ow/A$ limping It/.
9*
©<er5^co©*»
do
©o^-aste
d&& 9 he talks.
09©aS)2S
QoS, bespeaks •
mo
ep«$©«> o®«
«®S, he cures.
ido
©aska©®*©
bo <9, Ac speak* {cleverly')
bdo
©*«J«>©6©
pt3o4j& f Ac speaks ( cleverly )
«w3b
m<ar5®)oo<?<an
®do^, At entertains {chart*
tably)
ye©8
-^s«?©©a^«9
«)lo?3, ft moves -
«a oo^3, he finishes.
CS>C$p
moitoOd
*©g
©©O^, l< shakes.
»tSo
05'25 J 5^GSD@«><3't^ffq
«o oaS, Ac repents.
«eS>?8»W033*
®«5*»<S, bethinks.
©o
©b«ft®«aS}©o
©0^3, Ac S 022 W*
Q©<9, Ac ma/A* (gently.)
Qo %
* W«-J«>0S3©*»
©
J»«55«ttC3*
©e»<3* it becomes.
<6
wdkfcoca*
t »©<9, ft become*.
b ^3, Ac ffocs.
©9
*0^8, Ac tkinlfi,
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
Digitized by LjOOQ ie
Digitized by
Digitized by
Digitized by
Digitized by
Digitized by
Pali Grammar by Benjamin Clough
Anónimo